Starters and party food for large get-togethers or a 3-course meal https://properfoodie.com/starters-sides-party-food/ Nutritious and full flavoured recipes Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:44 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.4 https://properfoodie.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/square-logo-96x96.png Starters and party food for large get-togethers or a 3-course meal https://properfoodie.com/starters-sides-party-food/ 32 32 Mango Salsa Recipe https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 17 Sep 2022 19:05:42 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9031 A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy.  👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Mango salsa is a great recipe for...

Read More

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Mango salsa is a great recipe for a healthy starter or refreshing side dish. Its easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser. Best served cold; toss in lime juice to keep the salsa at its freshest and then chill in the fridge.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough mango salsa to serve 6 people:

Ingredients for making mango salsa.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.

Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.

Chilli: Optional.

Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
  2. Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
  3. Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
  4. Garnish with freshly chopped coriander (cilantro).
How to make mango salsa step by step

💭 Expert tips

  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.
  • Mango and avocado salsa is a dish I like to make in advance as the mango and avocado chopping can be a bit messy. However, if you don't mind a bit salad prep just before dinner or even once your guests have arrived then this is quite an easy recipe to knock together from scratch. For more salad ideas why not try my Vietnamese style beef salad, Italian pasta salad, roasted cauliflower salad.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.

Is this recipe healthy?

This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.

Bowl of mango and avocado salsa.

🥗 Other starter recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of mango salsa with some being scooped out on a tortilla crisp.
Print

Mango Salsa Recipe

A refreshing mango salsa recipe, great served on its own or loaded on tortilla chips. Made with chunks of avocado, fiery red chilli and a good handful of fresh coriander. A perfect Caribbean starter or side dish and especially great with anything spicy. 
Course Appetizer, lunch, Salad, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine cuban, Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Low Calorie, Low Fat, Low Lactose, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 43kcal

Equipment

  • Sharp knife
  • chopping board
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Large spoon
  • Serving bowl and spoon

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion finely chopped
  • 2 limes juiced
  • 1 chilli deseeded and finely chopped
  • 2 mangoes peeled and chopped
  • 1 avocado peeled and chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro) roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Finely dice the red onion and mix in a large bowl with the juice of one lime.
    1 red onion, 2 limes
  • Add finely chopped chilli and diced mango and avocado to the red onion. Add the juice of a second lime and toss everything together well.
    2 mangoes, 1 avocado, 1 chilli, 2 limes
  • Season with salt and pepper (to taste).
    Salt and pepper
  • Garnish with freshly chopped coriander.
    Handful of fresh coriander (cilantro)

Notes

Limes: Lime juice is essential in the recipe for keeping everything fresh and vibrant. The acidic lime prevents oxidation and browning of the chopped avocado. If you can't get hold of limes you can also use lemon juice.
Avocados and mangos: Use ripe avocados and mangos that feel soft but not squishy.
Chilli: Optional.
Coriander (cilantro): Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped parsley.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, this easy mango salsa recipe can be made up to one day ahead of time. Make sure to mix in plenty of lime juice to keep all the ingredients fresh, then store in the fridge until ready to serve.
Is this recipe healthy? This recipe is bursting at the seams with nutrients; from the monounsaturated fats in the avocado to all the fibre and vitamins in the mango, lime and chilli. - Its really not just a pretty dish.
Expert tips:
  • At the start of the mango salsa recipe add juice of one lime to the chopped red onion and leave to soak for a minute or two. This will help to take the harsh bite out of the raw onion flavour.
  • Add the rest of the lime juice to the chopped avocado and mango to help keep it fresh and to stop the browning process.
  • Sprinkle the coriander over the top as a garnish or for a more even finish and taste stir well into the finished salsa dish.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 43kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 438IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Sept 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips. 

The post Mango Salsa Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
Pea and Ham Soup https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/#comments Sun, 13 Feb 2022 23:14:02 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7051 Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe For a quick and easy, family friendly meal this recipe is up...

Read More

The post Pea and Ham Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes.

Pea and ham soup in a bowl topped with creme fraiche, chunks of ham and fresh mint
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

For a quick and easy, family friendly meal this recipe is up there with some of the best. Its quick, nutritious, and everyone gets a good helping of greens. Its also great for using up any leftover ham.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes enough pea and ham soup to serve 2 people (or 4 starter-sized portions):

Ingredients for making pea and ham soup.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Peas: Use fresh or frozen peas in this recipe.

Ham: Choose wafer thin or thick cut ham, which ever you prefer. This recipe is perfect for using up any leftover ham thats about to go out of date. Or why not try with gammon.

Crème fraîche: Crème fraîche is used here to add a slight creaminess to the soup without making it too rich, however it is completely optional. Alternatively use plain yogurt or soured cream.

Mint: Chopped mint is the perfect partner to this soup and adds a lovely freshness to the sweet peas, but again this is an optional extra.

Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions and garlic and fry until soft.
  2. Next add the flour and stir in well.
  3. Gradually add the stock whilst continuing to stir.
  4. Add the frozen peas then simmer for 2-3 minutes until cooked through.Four images showing how to make pea and ham soup for steps 1-4.
  5. Remove the pan from the heat and transfer the soup to a blender. Blitz until smooth. (alternatively use a hand blender).
  6. Return the soup to the pan, once warmed through taste and season. Then add the ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves and mix in well. Serve with extra ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves.Two images showing how to make pea and ham soup for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

  • Frozen peas: To get this meal on the table within 15 minutes I always opt for frozen peas. Frozen peas are a great veg to have handy in the freezer. Just add directly to the soup and cook for a couple of minutes. So easy! 
  • Vegetarian version: For a veggie version of this recipe just leave out the ham or alternatively try my Tuscan Ribollita Soup, Leek and Potato Soup or Cauliflower Soup.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Once made this soup can be stored in the fridge or freezer. Simply wait for the soup to fully cool then transfer to a sealable container. Seal and store in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to one month. To reheat defrost in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and gently heat until piping hot throughout.

How do you thicken pea and ham soup?

This recipe uses flour as a thickening agent, which is added at the start of the recipe. The stock is gradually stirred in, allowing the flour to cook out and create a thick sauce.

How do you make soup thinner?

If you find the soup to be too thick once its been blended, it can be thinned down by adding a ladle of water. Stir in the water and keep adding small amounts of water until happy with the consistency.

pea and ham soup in a bowl with creme fraishe, mint leaves and ground black pepper.

🍵 Other soup recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Pea and ham soup in a bowl topped with creme fraiche, chunks of ham and fresh mint
Print

Pea and Ham Soup

Quick and easy pea and ham soup, made with fresh or frozen peas and your favourite choice of ham. A filling and nutritious midweek meal or easy starter for your next dinner party, ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Dinner, lunch, supper
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 474kcal

Ingredients

  • 20 g butter
  • 1 onion finely chopped
  • 2 celery stalks finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 20 g plain flour
  • 500 ml veg stock
  • 400 g frozen garden peas or if you have fresh - 500g un-podded peas - additional time need to pod your peas!
  • Sea salt and pepper to season
  • 125 g of your favourite choice of ham or gammon and extra to serve on top
  • 1 tablespoon crème fraîche and extra to serve on top (optional)
  • Handful fresh mint leaves finely chopped and extra to serve on top (optional)
  • Bread for dunking optional

Instructions

  • Melt the butter in a large pan on a medium heat. Add the onions, celery and garlic and fry until soft.
    20 g butter, 1 onion, 2 celery stalks, 2 cloves garlic
  • Next add the flour and stir in well.
    20 g plain flour
  • Gradually add the stock whilst continuing to stir.
    500 ml veg stock
  • Add the frozen peas then simmer for 2-3 minutes until cooked through.
    400 g frozen garden peas
  • Remove the pan from the heat and transfer the soup to a blender. Blitz until smooth (alternatively use a hand blender).
  • Return the soup to the pan, once warmed through check consistency, taste and season. Then add the ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves and mix in well. Serve with extra ham, crème fraîche and mint leaves.
    Sea salt and pepper to season, 125 g of your favourite choice of ham or gammon, 1 tablespoon crème fraîche, Handful fresh mint leaves

Video

Notes

Ham: Choose wafer thin or thick cut ham, which ever you prefer. This recipe is perfect for using up any leftover ham thats about to go out of date. Or why not try with gammon.
Crème fraîche: Crème fraîche is used here to add a slight creaminess to the soup without making it too rich, however it is completely optional. Alternatively use plain yogurt or soured cream.
Mint: Chopped mint is the perfect partner to this soup and adds a lovely freshness to the sweet peas, but again this is an optional extra.
Stock: Use good quality stock, both vegetable or a meat based stock will work well.
Frozen peas: To get this meal on the table within 15 minutes I always opt for frozen peas. Frozen peas are a great veg to have handy in the freezer. Just add directly to the soup and cook for a couple of minutes. So easy! 
Vegetarian version: For a veggie version of this recipe just leave out the ham or alternatively try my Tuscan Ribollita Soup, Leek and Potato Soup or Cauliflower Soup.
How to store? Once made this soup can be stored in the fridge or freezer. Simply wait for the soup to fully cool then transfer to a sealable container. Seal and store in the fridge for 2-3 days or freeze for up to one month. To reheat defrost in the fridge overnight (if frozen) then transfer to a pan and gently heat until piping hot throughout.
How do you thicken pea and ham soup? This recipe uses flour as a thickening agent, which is added at the start of the recipe. The stock is gradually stirred in, allowing the flour to cook out and create a thick sauce.
How do you make soup thinner? If you find the soup to be too thick once its been blended, it can be thinned down by adding a ladle of water. Stir in the water and keep adding small amounts of water until happy with the consistency. 

Nutrition

Serving: 192g | Calories: 474kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 1837mg | Potassium: 783mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 2332IU | Vitamin C: 85mg | Calcium: 78mg | Iron: 4mg

This post was first published in Jul 2018. Updated in Feb 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Pea and Ham Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pea-and-ham-soup/feed/ 7
Leek and Potato Soup https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/#respond Fri, 24 Jan 2020 16:18:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12133 Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable,...

Read More

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Not only is leek and potato soup tasty and comforting but its also a really nutritious recipe and perfect for refuelling on a cold day. Potatoes are a starchy carbohydrate and a great source of calcium, Iron and B vitamins. With the skins on, potatoes also provide a good source of fibre. So to boost the fibre and the texture of this recipe, give your tatties a good wash and leave the skins on!

This warming, full flavoured, healthy potato soup also contains 1 portion of your 5 a day, from the onions, celery and leeks. Plus, each serving of soup comes in at under 300kcal, meaning that theres plenty of room left for a nice chunk of crusty bread on the side. For a soup without potatoes that still contains plenty of nutrients try my rustic, traditional Tuscan ribollita soup

🥘 Ingredients

To make a pot of this delicious leek and potato soup, to serve 4 people, you will need:

  • Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Vegetable stock 
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream (optional)
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve (optional)

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.

Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 

Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 

Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery.

Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.

Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
  2. Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
  3. Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
  4. Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 1-4.
  5. When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half. 
  6. Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
  7. For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
  8. Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.Step by step images of how to make leek and potato soup steps 5-8.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup?

To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.

How do you make potato soup thicker?

As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more.
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.

How to store?

Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.

What to serve with leek and potato soup?

Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.

What is Vichyssoise?

The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

A bowl of homemade leek and potato soup with a second bowl of soup in the background.

🥔 How can I get more potatoes into my diet?

Potatoes are so versatile and they are great served up with most things.  Like roast potatoes or mashed potatoes with your roast chicken or roast beef dinner on a Sunday. Or if you just want an easy side to go with your mid week meals try these garlic, herb foil pack potatoes. Other potato soups that are just as satisfying as leek and potato on a cold day are celeriac and potato soup or creamy clam chowder.  Or for a meal thats a little more substantial why not try my super affordable Frozen Salmon and potato traybake? Or salmon and mackerel fishcakes.

If you want something a little more indulgent then add potatoes to a pie: fish pie, minted lamb pie, cottage pie or shepherds pie. 

🍵 Other soup recipes you might like:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

A bowl of leek and potato soup topped with a swirl of cream and chopped chives.
Print

Leek and potato soup

Leek and potato soup or vichyssoise soup is a classic dish that is really easy to make in just 30 minutes. This comforting soup is great for using up leftovers, has an amazing full on flavour and as a bonus its super healthy as its packed full of nutrients. Made with everyday ingredients, its affordable, tasty and a great recipe for batch cooking and stocking up the freezer.
Course main meal, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British, French
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 248kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 30 g Butter
  • 1 Onion finely chopped 125g
  • 2 celery sticks chopped 100g
  • 2 medium leeks chopped 200
  • 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed 600g
  • 500 ml vegetable stock Plus extra water if required
  • Pinch of salt
  • 2 tablespoon double cream Optional
  • Chopped chives and extra cream to serve Optional

Instructions

  • Place a large pan on a medium heat and melt 30g of butter. Add the chopped onions and celery and gently fry until the onions are soft.
    30 g Butter, 1 Onion finely chopped, 2 celery sticks chopped
  • Add the chopped leeks and potatoes to the pan and stir in well.
    2 medium leeks chopped, 3 large potatoes peeled and cubed
  • Next pour in the vegetable stock and bring to a gentle simmer
    500 ml vegetable stock
  • Place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • When the potatoes are fully cooked, thoroughly blend the soup until smooth. Do this by either transferring the soup to a blender or use a hand blender directly in the pan. If you would prefer a chunky soup then only blend half and then mix with the unblended half.
  • Have extra water ready to add if you want to thin the consistency of your soup. I usually thin mine down to the point where it lightly coats the back of a spoon. When you're happy with the consistency, taste the soup and add salt if needed.
    Pinch of salt
  • For extra creamy soup stir in 2 tablespoon of double cream (optional).
    2 tablespoon double cream
  • Serve the soup in bowls and if you like top with extra cream and chopped chives.
    Chopped chives and extra cream to serve

Video

Notes

Butter: Use butter for a richer flavour, but if you prefer you can substitute with a tablespoon of oil.
Leeks: The best part of the leek to use for soup is the white and light green parts. The darker green parts toward the top of the plant tend to be a bit tough and fibrous - not great if your wanting to make a soup! before chopping leeks make sure the insides are clean. To do this slice the leek in half length ways to reveal all the layers inside. Then carefully run each half under the cold water tap to wash aways any bits of dirt caught between the layers. 
Potatoes: For a creamy soup opt for a fluffy potato such as Maris Piper or King Edward. If you want a chunky soup then use waxy potatoes (Charlotte), which will hold together better. 
Celery: Celery adds a wonderful flavour alongside the onion, however, the soup won't be ruined of you prefer not to add celery. Vegetable stock: Use good quality vegetable stock.
Double cream and chives: these are a serving suggestion and completely optional. If you decide to use the cream, add a bit at a time and taste until you are happy.
How do you make a chunky leek and potato soup? To make a chunky soup instead of smooth, only blend half of the soup and then mix back into the unblended half.
How do you make potato soup thicker? As potatoes are starchy its usual for this type of soup to be too thick rather than too thin. The addition of extra stock or water will help to thin it out. However, if you add too much water you may end up with soup that is too thin. To avoid this add any extra water or stock a bit at a time and stir in well before adding more. 
If your soup is too thin you can thicken it back up by gently heating and gradually reducing down.
How to store? Leek and potato soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days. If you are adding cream, check that this has a good date on it and will keep for the 3 days. Alternatively only add the cream when you are ready to eat the soup. Alternatively freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. As potatoes are super starchy make sure you stir the soup continually during reheating or the potato may stick to the bottom of the pan and burn.
What to serve with leek and potato soup? Leek and potato soup is best served up with a crunchy piece of buttered bread or soft, white homemade bread rolls.
What is Vichyssoise? The french name for leek and potato soup is Vichyssoise soup. Vichyssoise is slightly different to this recipe as its usually a fully blended soup thats served cold. 

Nutrition

Serving: 350ml | Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 645mg | Potassium: 840mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1513IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jan 2020. Updated in Sept 2021 with improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Leek and Potato Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/leek-and-potato-soup/feed/ 0
Cauliflower Cheese https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/#comments Tue, 19 Jan 2021 00:01:47 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12215 This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to...

Read More

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.

Cauliflower presented in a shallow dish with a creamy sauce and topped with baked on cheese and freshly chopped parsley.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is one of those side dish heros that will always go well with any other main dish. Whether your cooking up a joint for a roast beef dinner or lovingly basting your Sunday Roast Chicken, this delicious recipe will not let you down.

Its also great served up along side steak and ale pie or other classic roast dinner favourites like roast potatoes, mash potatoes, foil pack potatoes, green bean almondine and Yorkshire pudding. 

🥘 Ingredients

To make cauliflower cheese you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make cauliflower cheese with text overlay stating each ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.

Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.

Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.

Cauliflower: For variations on this dish substitute the cauliflower for broccoli or leeks.

Parsley and black pepper: Optional

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  2. The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  3. Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  4. Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.A collage of 4 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  6. Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes. A collage of 2 images showing how to make this cauliflower recipe step by step for instructions 5 and 6.
  7. Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

💭 Expert tips

  • Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
  • Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
  • Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.

❓ Frequently asked questions

What is a roux?

A roux is basically melted butter and flour mixed together to form a paste. This paste is the starting point for making cheese sauce. Many recipes say to use equal amounts of butter and flour, but I prefer to use slightly less butter, to give a thicker roux and to stop any excess butter forming on top of the finished sauce.

Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?

Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery.

I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Can the recipe be made in advance?

Yes you can prepare this recipe right up until the point its ready to go into the oven. At this point allow the whole thing to cool and then cover and place in the fridge until you are ready to bake it.

Can this recipe be reheated?

You can reheat this recipe if it has been stored correctly. Make sure any leftovers are fully cooled then cover and store in the fridge. When you are ready to reheat remove from the fridge, take off the cover and reheat in the oven for 5 - 10 minutes or in the microwave for 2-3 minutes, until piping hot.

Can cauliflower cheese be frozen?

Cauliflower cheese is best frozen before it has been baked. Make the recipe up to the point that that it would normally go into the oven. Then allow to fully cool, cover with a lid or cling film and freeze for up to 3 months. Fully defrost over night before baking at 180 degrees C for 20 minutes.

Cauliflower in a creamy cheese sauce presented in a shallow dish and topped with baked on cheese and parsley

Other cauliflower recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Cauliflower cheese in a black snd white dish with fresh parsley sprinkled over the top
Print

Cauliflower Cheese

This easy cauliflower cheese recipe is a full flavoured side dish with a creamy cheese sauce made from scratch and baked to perfection. The sauce takes just 5 minutes to whip together and is made in the traditional way with a roux mix (butter and flour). This is one of my favourite side dishes to serve up with any meal, and its particularly good with a Sunday roast.
Course side, Side Dish, sunday roast
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 225kcal

Equipment

  • Small milk pan for the cheese sauce
  • 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish

Ingredients

  • 20 g Butter
  • 30 g Plain flour
  • 350 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 50 g Cheddar grated
  • 1 medium cauliflower leaves removed and cut into florets (600g)

For the topping

  • 30 g Cheddar grated
  • Black pepper
  • Freshly chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Start by making the roux. To make the roux place a small milk pan on a medium heat and add 20g of butter. When the butter has melted, stir in 30g plain flour to form a paste - this paste is the roux.
  • The next step is to turn the roux into a white sauce (or bechamel sauce). To do this gradually add 350ml of semi skimmed milk to the roux whilst continuing to heat and stir.
  • Once all the milk has been added, you are left with a silky smooth white sauce. Turn the pan down to a low heat and add 50g of grated cheese. Stir in until fully melted into the sauce.
  • Next, spread cauliflower florets across the base of an 8 inch, shallow ovenproof dish. Pour over the cheese sauce ensuring all the cauliflower is covered.
  • Top with a scattering of extra grated cheese and some black pepper.
  • Then bake at 180 degrees C for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven and check if the cauliflower is cooked and soft enough by skewering with a knife. If not return, to the oven for a further 5 minutes.
  • Once cooked, if the top isn't as golden brown as you would like it, place under the grill on a high heat for a couple of minutes or until you are happy with the colour.

Video

Notes

Flour: Use plain or all purpose flour.
Butter: Butter is required to form the roux, which is the base of the sauce.
Cheese: The simplest cheese sauce uses cheddar and here I have used a medium cheddar. However, you could substitute with other types of cheese for a variety of flavours. Try with red leicester, mozzarella or a blue cheese if you like strong flavours.
Parsley and black pepper: Optional
Variations: Try this cheese sauce over broccoli or leeks or use it to make macaroni cheese. For something a little different why not have a go at sprouts in cheese sauce.
Preventing a lumpy cheese sauce: When adding the milk to the roux (paste) it is essential to stir continuously. Stopping stirring will cause lumps to form and no amount of stirring after this will get rid of them. You can also remove the pan from the heat as you need to if you feel its getting too hot or if you can't stir fast enough to stop lumps forming.
Preventing a skin forming on the sauce: When the sauce has been made and is removed from the heat it will immediately start to cool. During this process a skin will start to form on top of the sauce. This may happen before you get chance to pour it over the cauliflower. To prevent this, place a piece of cling film directly onto the surface of the sauce as soon as you take it off the heat. When you are ready to use, remove the cling film and use a spoon to scrape any sauce off the cling film and back into the pan.
Why is my cauliflower cheese watery?: Cauliflower cheese can go watery if the cauliflower is overcooked. Overcooked cauliflower releases water, which will seep into the rest of the dish. So even if your sauce was thick when it went in the oven, if its in there too long, the water from the cauliflower will cause it to go watery. I would advise to not bake for longer than 20-25 minutes. If by this point its not quite brown enough on top, remove from the oven and place under the grill on high for 1-2 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 272g | Calories: 225kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 39mg | Sodium: 246mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 415IU | Vitamin C: 72mg | Calcium: 282mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in January 2020. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Cauliflower Cheese appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-cheese/feed/ 5
Italian Pasta Salad https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/#respond Fri, 24 Sep 2021 14:19:24 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10857 A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and...

Read More

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Italian Pasta salad is one of those recipes that literally has everything going for it. Its easy to make, easy to store, great for meal prep and really useful for using up any leftovers.

The best thing about pasta salad is the variety of ingredients that can be used; from different types of pasta to numerous different fruits, vegetable and cheeses. Also, as its a cold dish, its easy to store in the fridge keeping everything lovely and fresh and crisp.

🥘 Ingredients

To make a large bowl of Italian pasta salad at home you will need:

Italian pasta salad ingredients.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.

Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes. For an extra vibrant salad look for different colours of tomatoes (heritage/heirloom).

Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.

Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella

Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
  2. In a small bowl mix together 2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon honey, 1 teaspoon wholegrain mustard, juice of half a lemon and 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning.
  3. Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  4. Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.Step by step images of how to make Italian pasta salad.

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra colour use green, red and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.
  • To boost the protein content of this salad, without adding meat, add in a tin of drained cannellini beans.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.

How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together?

To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.

Can this recipe be made in advance?

Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.

Large bowl filled with Italian Pasta Salad with a serving spoon and small bowl of grated pecorino cheese in the background.

🥗 Other delicious salad recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Large bowl filled with cooked fusilli pasta, colourful tomatoes, cucumber, mozzarella pearls and topped with basil leaves and grated pecorino.
Print

Italian Pasta Salad

A fresh and vibrant Italian pasta salad made with wholegrain pasta, juicy tomatoes and creamy mozzarella. This nutritious and full flavoured pasta salad is perfect for dishing out at lunches or parties and is great as an on the go snack or working lunch. Make this Italian Pasta salad recipe in just 15 minutes and enjoy topped with fresh basil and a homemade Italian dressing.
Course Dinner, lunch, party food
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 450kcal

Equipment

  • Large pan to cook pasta
  • Large mixing bowl for the pasta salad
  • Small bowl to make the dressing

Ingredients

For the Pasta Salad

  • 250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried uncooked
  • 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped
  • 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes
  • 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes
  • 60 g Black olives halved
  • 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up
  • Handful of basil leaves roughly torn
  • Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped
  • Half tin of cannellini beans optional

For the Italian Dressing

  • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or any alternative cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Honey
  • 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard
  • ½ a lemon
 juiced
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning

Toppings

  • 25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese or alternative hard cheese
  • Extra basil leaves

Instructions

  • Cook the pasta in boiling water for 10 minutes until al dente (or according to packet instructions). Place the cooked pasta and pasta salad ingredients in a large mixing bowl and toss together well.
    250 g Wholewheat fusilli pasta dried, 500 g heritage and/or baby tomatoes roughly chopped, 100 g cucumber chopped into small cubes, 80 g Red bell pepper chopped into small cubes, 60 g Black olives halved, 100 g Mozzarella pearls or large ball torn up, Handful of basil leaves roughly torn, Handful of fresh parsley finely chopped, Half tin of cannellini beans
  • In a small bowl mix together olive oil, apple cider vinegar, honey, wholegrain mustard, lemon juice and Italian seasoning.
    2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Honey, 1 teaspoon Wholegrain mustard, ½ a lemon
 juiced, 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • Pour the dressing over the pasta salad and mix in.
  • Top with freshly grated pecorino and basil leaves.
    25 g Freshly grated pecorino cheese, Extra basil leaves

Video

Notes

How to store? Pasta salad will last 3 to 4 days if covered with a sealable lid or cling film and kept in the fridge. This recipe a great option for meal prep and will easily provide meals for 3 or 4 days.
How to you stop cooked pasta from sticking together? To ensure the pasta doesn't stick together make sure the cooking water is boiling and stir the pasta well as soon as its placed into the water. After cooking rinse under cold water. If you aren't using the pasta right away it may eventually start to stick together. All you need to do is rinse the pasta under cold water again and toss until the pieces separate.
Can this recipe be made in advance? Yes pasta salad can be made up to 3 days in advance then covered and stored in the fridge until ready to serve.
Pasta: This recipe uses wholegrain fusilli, but any type of small pasta will work well.
Tomatoes: Use fresh, vine ripened tomatoes.
Mozzarella: A soft Italian cheese is essential for making this Italian pasta salad. Use small pearls of mozzarella or alternatively tear up a larger ball. Burrata is also a great option. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Pecorino cheese: This is optional and can also be substituted with parmesan. Look for vegetarian alternatives if you are making a vegetarian salad.
Fresh basil and parsley: Fresh herbs are just the best taste in salads and I highly recommend using fresh basil at the very least. Especially in this Italian salad as it pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and mozzarella.
Cannellini Beans: Beans are an optional extra and are used here to bulk out the salad and boost the protein content without adding meat.
Tips:
  • For extra colour use green, red, orange and yellow tomatoes. Heritage or heirloom tomatoes are usually the best option.
  • Make sure the cooked pasta is fully cooled before adding to the salad. To do this, drain into a sieve then rinse in cold water until the pasta is cold to the touch. There are 2 reasons for doing this. Firstly, to stop the cooking process and ensure the pasta doesn't go soggy. Secondly, to make sure that the rest of the ingredients stay crisp and fresh.
  • If you are cooking pasta for a warm dish, then it is not necessary to rinse the pasta. Instead add straight to the sauce like in this salmon pasta recipe or this salmon and prawn linguine.

Nutrition

Serving: 296g | Calories: 450kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 417mg | Potassium: 553mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2061IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 250mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in Aug 2019. Updated in Sept 2021 with an improved photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Italian Pasta Salad appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-pasta-salad/feed/ 0
Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/ https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/#respond Thu, 27 Oct 2016 14:07:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=18017 Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes. 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With autumn comes the changing of the weather and leaves and the need for more comforting and warming dishes comes about. So its out with the basil and in with the celery leaf, out with the pine nuts and in with the walnut to create this delicious autumnal pesto. Celery and walnut pesto is less aromatic than a basil pesto recipe, with more of an earthy flavour. Its perfectly balanced to go with autumnal dishes such as roasted root veggies, baked sweet potatoes, warming and creamy lasagnas and even plump, little ravioli parcels.....there's plenty of ideas to go at.

The celery leaf is also great to use up in soup recipes: celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup post 

Celery, apple and walnut pesto drizzled over circles of baked sweet potato.

The autumnal vibe of this recipe was inspired by our latest trip to Italy. Did we eat a lot whilst we were there?.... Yes, of course, we ate a tonne. Did we care that we were meant to be there to plan our wedding and not eat all of Italy's pasta in one sitting? No, not one bit.

italy in autumn
Autumn sunrise, Peschiera del Garda

🥘 Ingredients

To make this walnut pesto recipe you will need:

  • Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • Walnut oil
  • Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • Walnuts
  • Green apples cored and diced
  • Mint leaves
  • Edamame beans
  • Parmesan grated
  • Salt
  • Cider vinegar

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.

Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.

Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.

Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
  2. Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  3. Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
  4. Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Our wedding

But yes......our wedding!! Thats right - this massive thing that seems to be gobbling up my time at the moment, but something that I've failed to talk about on here. So next year, Ben and I will be married in the beautiful surroundings of the Italian countryside, following on from our engagement last year whilst we were in Pienza!

italy-in-autumn
Our wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Negrar.

Of course the plans so far for the wedding are lots of pasta, risotto, wine and a good bunch of laughter and happy times. Excited doesn't even begin to describe where I am at with this right now. There's still lots of planning to be sorted, and I'm sure a great deal of stress to cope with but I can't wait to get back to Italy next year and become Mrs Jones :-O

italy-in-autumn2
Our wedding hotel: Delsa, Verona

🍹Autumn holiday

But back to the trip we've just had: A holiday abroad in autumn is just simply magical. All the trees are changing and brandishing fiery reds or warming oranges, the mornings have a slight chill which brings a mysterious mist and subtle sunrises. The birds are also aware of the changes and migrate above the skies or dance in pretty patterns through the trees.

Grapevines are usually harvested for their annual fruits at this time of year, but some vineyards have vines that flower a little later so are still flush with huge bunches of juicy grapes. A glorious site and I really do hope that next year we can get wedding pictures amongst grapevines with cascading bunches of grapes 🙂

italy in autumn
Italian grapevines in Autumn at Peschiera del Garda
italy-in-autumn
Salo, Lake Garda, Italy in autumn
italy-in-autumn3
Peschiera del Garda, Italy in Autumn

The autumnal produce of Italy from peaches and beetroot to truffles and cabbage, meant that we had some stunning plates of food. Of course there was the usual mountain of cheese and cold cuts, but there was also plenty of inspiration for me with dishes like: sea bream baked with paprika and radicchio; suckling pig with apples, raisins and cabbage; shredded beetroot chutney; fresh pappardelle pasta with a creamy mushroom sauce and fresh truffle; the glorious and ubiquitous apricot breakfast tart; sea bream and lime tortelloni with burrata cheese; and of course walnut pesto. I just had to have a go at making my own version of this incredible pesto! 

💭 Expert tips

  • Only add half of the liquid ingredients (oil and water) to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.

What to serve with walnut pesto?

This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery apple and walnut pesto in a bowl.
Print

Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto

Sweet and earthy walnut pesto recipe made with juicy apples, crunchy walnuts and fresh celery leaves. This recipe is great for using up the leaves on top of your celery and can be whizzed up in just 5 minutes.
Course Appetizer, condiment, dip, party food, side, Snack
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 10 portions
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • 100 g Celery leaves roughly chopped
  • 150 ml Walnut oil
  • 100 ml water
  • 2 Garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 50 g Walnuts
  • 85 g Green apples cored and diced
  • 10 g Mint leaves
  • 50 g Edamame beans
  • 75 g Parmesan grated
  • Pinch of Salt
  • Teaspoon Cider vinegar

Instructions

  • Place the celery leaves, garlic cloves, walnuts, chopped apples, mint leaves, beans, salt and cider vinegar into a blender or food processor. Add half of the water and half of the walnut oil.
    100 g Celery leaves, 150 ml Walnut oil, 100 ml water, 2 Garlic cloves, 50 g Walnuts, 85 g Green apples, 10 g Mint leaves, 50 g Edamame beans, Pinch of Salt, Teaspoon Cider vinegar
  • Pulse into a paste adding more water or oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
    75 g Parmesan
  • Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Notes

How to store? Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.
What to serve with walnut pesto? This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.
Celery leaves: can be replaced with celery stems but make sure to peel the outer edge to remove any stringy bits first.
Edamame beans: are optional but will add extra protein and give the pesto a more robust texture.
Walnuts: are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be pecans.
Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 10portions | Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 12g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 143mg | Potassium: 97mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 158IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 100mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Walnut Pesto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/walnut-pesto/feed/ 0
Basil Pesto Recipe https://properfoodie.com/basil-pesto/ https://properfoodie.com/basil-pesto/#comments Tue, 10 Aug 2021 19:45:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1482 Homemade pesto recipe made with fresh basil leaves, pine nuts and grated parmesan. Freshly made in just 5 minutes and bursting with aromatic flavours and an intense green colour. This is pesto at its best! Find out how to make and store this vibrant pesto recipe so you always have a jar ready to go...

Read More

The post Basil Pesto Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Homemade pesto recipe made with fresh basil leaves, pine nuts and grated parmesan. Freshly made in just 5 minutes and bursting with aromatic flavours and an intense green colour. This is pesto at its best!

Find out how to make and store this vibrant pesto recipe so you always have a jar ready to go in the fridge.

Homemade basil pesto in an open jar with a teaspoon of pesto held above the jar.
Homemade Basil Pesto
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Basil pesto is great to have handy in the fridge. Especially if its homemade. You can't beat the intense, aromatic flavours that come from making pesto yourself at home. This recipe is nice and easy and super quick. So even if you have next to no time you can make the recipe in less than 10 minutes and be getting on with the rest of your day. 

Pesto is the perfect partner to so many foods that it will always provide you with a great dinner at the drop of a hat. Mix it with some diced, pan fried chicken and serve with rice or in a wrap. Add it to some freshly cooked pasta or pour over some ravioli. Mix it into a couscous or quinoa salad or drizzle over baked fish. 

🥘 Ingredients

To make basil pesto at home you will need:

The ingredients required to make homemade basil pesto.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

Pine nuts: Pine nuts are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be cashew nuts or pecans. Walnut pesto is also an option.

Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the basil leaves, garlic clove, pine nuts and salt into a blender or food processor. Add just half of the oil.
  2. Pulse into a paste adding more oil if needed.
  3. Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
  4. Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.Step by step images of how to make homemade basil pesto

💭 Expert tips

  • Only add half of the oil to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to store?

Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.

What to serve with basil pesto?

This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on ravioli, roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish.

For something a little different try basil pesto on a pizza base, over tomato and mozzarella salad or layer into a vegetable lasagna or aubergine parmigiana.

A small jar with the lid off filled with homemade basil pesto.

🍯 Other homemade pestos and pastes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Homemade basil pesto in an open jar with a teaspoon of pesto held above the jar.
Print

Basil Pesto Recipe

Homemade pesto recipe made with fresh basil leaves, pine nuts and grated parmesan. Freshly made in just 5 minutes and bursting with aromatic flavours and an intense green colour. This is pesto at its best!
Course Appetizer, condiment, dip, party food, paste, sauce, Side Dish, Snack
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 217kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 garlic clove peeled and roughly chopped
  • 75 g fresh basil leaves
  • 30 g pine nuts
  • Pinch sea salt
  • 100 ml olive oil
  • 50 g parmesan grated

Instructions

  • Place the basil leaves, garlic clove, pine nuts and salt into a blender or food processor. Add just half of the oil.
    1 garlic clove, 75 g fresh basil leaves, 30 g pine nuts, Pinch sea salt, 100 ml olive oil
  • Pulse into a paste adding more oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan and stir in a bit at a time until you are happy with the taste and texture.
    50 g parmesan
  • Taste and add more salt, parmesan or oil depending on the taste and consistency you are after.

Notes

How to store? Transfer the pesto to a sealable jar or container. Store in the fridge for up to 2 weeks or freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost leave on the side overnight. If freezing I recommend freezing small amounts in small containers so you can defrost as much or as little as you need.
What to serve with basil pesto? This pesto is great stirred through pasta, rice, couscous, quinoa or any other kind of grain. I also love to use it as a topping on ravioli, roasted sweet potato, chargrilled veggies and pan fried chicken or fish. 

For something a little different try basil pesto on a pizza base, over tomato and mozzarella salad or layer into a vegetable lasagna or aubergine parmigiana.
Pine nuts: Pine nuts are the best option for this recipe but if you can't get hold of any a good substitute would be cashew nuts or pecans. Walnut pesto is also an option.
Parmesan: For a vegetarian version replace parmesan with vegetarian cheese. Tips: Only add half of the oil to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more oil if needed. Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan
Tips:
  • Only add half of the oil to begin with. Blend and then check the consistency before adding more oil if needed.
  • Grate the parmesan separately then stir in to the blended pesto. This improves the texture and gives more control over the taste and amount of parmesan

Nutrition

Calories: 217kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 135mg | Potassium: 77mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 726IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 123mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Oct 2015. Updated in Aug 2021 with an improved recipe and photos, and new step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Basil Pesto Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/basil-pesto/feed/ 1
Healthy Banana Bread https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/ https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/#respond Mon, 10 May 2021 15:06:52 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10739 Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost...

Read More

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.

Banana bread loaf on brown crumpled paper with 2 pieces sliced and falling down from the front of the loaf.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

With a simple method that requires only 10 minutes of prep time, this is a great dessert for when you have mouths to feed and time to save! Theres no need for any mixers and theres certainly no concerns over adding eggs too quickly or mixtures splitting. Just mix together the ingredients, pour into a lined loaf tin and bake. Super simple.

The ingredients in this recipe are also super healthy and include honey instead of refined sugar, oil instead of butter, and a mix of ground almonds and organic wholegrain spelt flour instead of plain white flour. This healthy banana bread also has an extra egg white and a teaspoon of organic apple Cider Vinegar. The end product: a wholesome, flavourful, nutritious and no mess banana bread treat.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this healthy banana bread recipe you will need:

Ingredients needed to make Banana Bread.

Ingredient notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet

Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.

Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.

Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.

Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.

Toppings: Topping options could include nuts and seeds, dried banana chips, pieces of fresh banana or a whole banana sliced in half length ways and positioned on top with the inside facing upwards. Place all topping on the top of the cake mix before being baked.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  2. Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6tbsp honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  3. Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  4. Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.Collage of 4 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 1-4.
  5. Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  6. Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.Collage of 2 images showing step by step how to make this this recipe for steps 5-6.

💭 Expert tips

  • For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
  • Use the nuts as a topping or stir into the cake mixture before pouring into the tin. Or if you prefer leave out altogether.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can bananas be too ripe to use in this recipe?

If the banana skins are completely black they may well be off. In which case its probably not worth using them. I have used bananas that have skins ranging from pale yellow to brown spotty and find that these always work well. Bananas with brown spotty skins will be softer and so will mash up easier, but the taste isn't really affected.  Bananas with green skins are too underripe and will be very hard and less sweet. To speed up the ripening process, loosely wrap the bananas in a brown paper bag.

What nuts go well with banana bread?

My favourite nut to go with banana is the walnut. Banana and walnut is a classic combination of sweet vs bitter and smooth vs crunchy, which is often found in the banana loaf recipe. Peanut butter and banana is obviously another well know classic combination. This salty nut-butter can be used to spread onto a slice of the finished loaf. Other nuts you could try: chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts.

What else can you add to banana bread?

To make this recipe your own, try adding different toppings or mix the toppings into the banana bread mixture. Or why not try mixing in nutella or other nut butters. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.

How to store?

Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Loaf of healthy banana bread being sliced in to.

🍨 Other fruity dessert recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Print

Healthy Banana Bread

Easy to make healthy banana bread, baked fresh at home with wholegrain spelt flour, honey and olive oil. The mixture is easy to prepare and can be ready in just 10 minutes! This delicious banana bread bakes with a perfect rise, a moist crumbly finish, and has a scattering of nuts for that extra boost in healthy fats.
Course afternoon tea, Breakfast, Dessert, party food, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 10 slices
Calories 238kcal

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Rubber spatula or spoon
  • Loaf tin lined with greaseproof paper
  • Cooling rack

Ingredients

  • 2 Large ripe bananas or 3 small
  • 6 tablespoon Honey
  • 2 Large eggs
  • 1 Egg white
  • 1 teaspoon Vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon Apple cider vinegar or lemon juice
  • 3 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 50 g Ground almonds
  • 1 teaspoon Ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon Bicarbonate of soda
  • 175 g Wholegrain spelt flour or any other variety of wholegrain flour
  • 10 g Flaked almonds Topping - optional
  • 25 g Chopped walnuts Topping - optional

Instructions

  • Start by pre-heating the oven to 165 degrees C. Then lightly grease a loaf tin and line with strip of greaseproof paper (should be as wide as the length of the tin) (Paper just needs to cover the base and the 2 long inner sides). Peel the bananas and place in a large mixing bowl. Use a fork to mash the bananas to a rough pulp (no need for the banana to be pureed as a few lumpy pieces adds to the texture and flavour).
  • Next add in all the other wet ingredients: 6 tablespoon honey, 2 eggs and one egg white, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar (or lemon juice), and 3 tablespoon of olive oil. Whisk together until fully combined.
  • Next add all the dry ingredients, apart from the flour, to the wet mixture: 50g ground almonds, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon bicarbonate of soda. Use a rubber spatula or wooden spoon to gently stir together.
  • Lastly add the wholegrain spelt flour (or other variety of wholegrain flour) to the bowl and fold in gently using the spatula.
  • Carefully pour the banana bread mixture into the lined loaf tin and sprinkle over the flaked almonds and chopped walnuts. Alternative fold the nuts into the mixture before transferring to the tin. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre-heated oven. Bake for 50 minutes until golden brown and a inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to stand for a minute or two before removing from the tin and placing on a cooling rack. When completely cool, remove the greaseproof paper, slice and serve.

Video

Notes

Bananas: Use bananas that are ripe and soft. Bananas that are underripe will be harder to mash up and less sweet
Ground cinnamon and nutmeg: spices work wonderfully well in banana bread and add a warming sweet and woody flavour. However, you can leave these out or replace with your preferred spices.
Apple cider vinegar: If you can't get hold of any replace with lemon juice.
Wholegrain spelt flour: Any type of wholegrain flour will work here. If you prefer you can replace with your preferred type of flour (gluten free, rye, almond). For a standard banana bread loaf opt for plain flour.
Ground almonds: If you don't have ground almonds or would prefer not use, then replace with the same amount of flour.
Gluten free banana bread: For gluten free banana bread replace the wholegrain flour with gluten free flour and check the labels of all other ingredients for any traces of gluten.
What other ingredients you can add to banana bread? To add a boost of flavour to your banana bread try topping with or mixing in walnuts, chopped hazelnuts, pistachio nuts or pecan nuts. Or why not try mixing in nutella or peanut butter. If you're not a massive fan of nuts you could try blueberries, chopped dates, chocolate chips, dried banana, fresh banana sliced in half, sultanas, black sesame seeds, sunflower seeds, orange peel or lime zest.
How to store? Banana bread will keep well and stay moist for at least 3-4 days if stored correctly. Wrap the banana bread in two layers of cling film or foil. Then store in a sealed, container at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 238kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 131mg | Potassium: 143mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 73IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 26mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in July 2019. Updated in May 2021 with improved step by step instructions and expert tips.

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to products I am recommending (apple cider vinegar and wholegrain spelt flour), which means if you click this link and then go on to purchase the product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

The post Healthy Banana Bread appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/banana-bread/feed/ 0
Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/#comments Wed, 14 Feb 2018 01:05:20 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6026 Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less...

Read More

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Tuscan Ribollita soup (Ribollita Toscana) is a creamy, Italian, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week, this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in. Get this healthy soup made and on the table in less than 45 minutes.

Ribollita vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

I'm back dreaming of the those rolling Toscana hills again - I can't help it. I always seem to come back to Italy when I'm cooking from the heart. And this dish really is from the heart. Its a homemade vegetable and bean soup - plain and simple. But this recipe has so much depth, flavour and tradition, that you know it just has to taste amazing.

Why make this recipe?

Tuscan Bean soup comes from making simple foods go a long way and also making sure that those simple foods don't go to waste. Some leftover carrots or celery? chuck em in. Some stale bread? Yep that goes in too! Its all about making the most of what you have and turning leftovers into a meal fit for a king.

This is the perfect recipe for the end of the week when you may have leftovers or food that needs to be used up. Its also really easy to make and super healthy - whats not to like?

If you're after some more Italian flavour and flare have a quick peek at my Amarone Risotto, or my homemade tiramisu, or how about a salami ragu? or if you're feeling really adventurous why not have a go at making your own pasta?

Ingredients

For this Tuscan ribollita soup recipe you will need a few simple ingredients, many of which are cupboard staples or possible leftovers.

Ingredients needed to make this recipe displayed on a table with text labels

Kale: Traditionally this recipe is made with black kale but any kind of kale or cabbage will work well here. I usually add the kale or cabbage at the very end and gently warm for 5 minutes so allowing it to soften whilst maintaining its colour and nutrients.

Parmesan: Freshly grated parmesan or pecorino is simply wonderful in this recipe. It adds a great depth of flavour and lovely a creamy texture. However, if you want to keep this soup strictly vegetarian then make sure to replace with a vegetarian cheese. Or if you want a super healthy vegetable soup then just skip the cheese.

Beans: Cannellini beans work well here as they are white and pearly and stand out against the other ingredients. They are also easy to blend down and so help to create a creamy soup without adding cream, milk, yogurt or cheese. Any other kind of white bean will work just as well.

Vine tomatoes: For the tomatoes I like to use baby vine tomatoes, which are slightly sweeter than the larger version. However, either the baby or the large variety work just as well. Either use two large vine tomatoes sliced and deseeded or weight out around 140g of baby vine tomatoes.

Step-by-Step Instructions

  1. Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook.
  2. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  3. After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for a 2-3 minutes.
  4. Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth.A collage of 4 images showing how to make White bean soup step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well.
  6. Stir in the black kale or cabbage. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  7. Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.
  8. TIP: To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.A collage of 4 images showing how to make white bean soup step by step for instructions 5-8.
Is ribollita soup healthy?

Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!

What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?

You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Why does this recipe use stale bread?

To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens it.

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up a bowl and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.

Other soup recipes you might like:

📖 Recipe

A Tuscan vegetable and bean soup served up in two bowls and topped with crusty bread, grated parmesan and fresh sprigs of thyme.
Print

Tuscan Ribollita Soup

Italian Ribollita soup is a creamy, healthy, full flavoured vegetable soup. Made with store cupboard ingredients and all those leftovers from the week this budget friendly, autumnal soup is perfect for an easy meal when the nights are starting to draw in.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine Italian, Mediterranean
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 People
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tbsp. Olive oil
  • 1 large onion 200g finely chopped
  • 1 Leek 80g chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 carrot 150g finely chopped
  • 2 celery 100g sticks finely chopped
  • 2 medium vine tomatoes deseeded and roughly cubed 140g
  • 600 ml vegetable stock plus extra water if required
  • 2 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tin cannellini beans 240g drained
  • 20 g freshly grated parmesan or vegetarian alternative
  • 100 g black kale or cabbage

Optional

  • Sea salt black pepper and extra parmesan to season
  • Ciabatta or stale bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large pan. Add the onions and leeks and cook on a medium heat until softened. Add garlic, dried thyme, carrot and celery then stir and continue to cook. Next add the tomatoes, stock and fresh sprigs of thyme. Stir and bring to the boil. Pop on a lid, reduce the heat and simmer for 15 minutes.
  • After 15 minutes remove the lid and stir in the cannellini beans and freshly grated parmesan. Cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next transfer ⅓ of the soup to a blender and blend until smooth. Pour the smooth part of the soup back in the chunky soup and mix well. Stir in the black kale. Pop the lid back on and simmer for a further 5 minutes or until the kale has just started to wilt.
  • Remove the lid, season with sea salt, black pepper and parmesan, then serve.

Video

Notes

Recipe tip:
To stick the traditional recipe of Tuscan Ribollita soup, line the serving bowls with stale bread (or slices of ciabatta if you prefer) and pour the soup over the top. The bread soaks up the soup and thickens.
Is ribollita soup healthy?
Honestly, this must be the best soup! Each bowl is just under 300 calories, with only 8g fat and 3g saturates. Its also full of veg - as you can probably see, each bowl has a whopping 4 servings of veg in it. Theres also 9g of fibre, 22g protein, 37g carbs, and its high in potassium and vitamin A (good for your heart muscles and your immune system). So you get the picture its nutritious, its well balanced - this is one healthy vegetable soup!
What can I use if I don't have vegetable stock?
You can definitely get by without vegetable stock, vegetable stock is basically vegetables boiled, with herbs and seasoning, to release their flavours and then conveniently packaged for you! just add water in place of the stock and cook the vegetables until they are soft then season the cooking water well.  Add dried Italian seasoning to enhance that authentic flavour!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 800mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 19g

This post was first published in February 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new ingredients photo, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Tuscan Ribollita Soup (Healthy Vegetable Soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/tuscan-ribollita-soup/feed/ 42
Nigiri Sushi https://properfoodie.com/nigiri-sushi/ https://properfoodie.com/nigiri-sushi/#respond Sat, 27 Jul 2019 18:02:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14353 Nigiri sushi is simply a ball of sushi rice topped with cooked butterflied king prawns. Usual served without any raw fish this is a great option sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can’t stand uncooked fish. These easy sushi balls are quick to make and perfect for using up that last bit of rice. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Nigiri Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Nigiri sushi is simply a ball of sushi rice topped with cooked butterflied king prawns. Usual served without any raw fish this is a great option sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can’t stand uncooked fish. These easy sushi balls are quick to make and perfect for using up that last bit of rice.

rice balls topped with butterflied prawns

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Nigiri sushi is a non-roll sushi and probably the easiest to make. First an oblong ball of sushi rice is formed using your hands. Then a topping is added - usually cooked, butterflied king prawns, which are secured onto the rice with a bit of wasabi paste. But you can use other types of fish or veg to top your nigiri. If you're being extra adventurous and looking for extra marks for presentation have a go at wrapping a thin strip of nori around the nigiri sushi.

Although a lot simpler than any other type of sushi the symmetrical and regimented look of the nigiri is quite effective. The perfect addition to a sushi platter masterpiece.

🍣 Making sushi at home

For more detailed information, sushi making tips and a full list of what you will need for making your own sushi at home jump over to my full guide for sushi rolls. Also, have a look at how to make sushi rice and how you can make other types of sushi rolls including maki sushiCalifornia rolls and dragon roll sushi.

platter of sushi rolls

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make 20 pieces of nigiri sushi you will need the following:

  • 300g of prepared sushi rice
  • 20 cooked and butterflied king prawns
  • Wasabi paste

Substitutions: If you prefer you can swap the prawns for other fish or vegetables. If you would like to use sashimi as a topping try this Sashimi Kit from The Fish Society, which also includes cooked butterflied prawns (Contains: 60g+ Saba Mackerel, 60g+ Gindara Black cod, 60g+ Maguro tuna, 60g+ Chalkstripe salmon belly, 60g+ butterflied king prawns, soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks).

if you aren't keen on wasabi then swap this for a milder condiment such as mayonnaise.

🔪 Instructions

For nigiri sushi you don't need any nori sheets and theres no rolling so you don't need a bamboo mat.

  1. First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe.cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  2. Wet your hands then take a small handful of sushi rice and start to shape in your hands to create a round oblong shape.shaping the rice into small oblong balls
  3. Next add a pea sized amount of wasabi paste to the top of each rice ball and spread out evenly using a knife.spreading wasabi paste on the top of each rice ball
  4. Finally, stick a topping to each rice ball, here I have used butterflied king prawns, which came preprepared in the Fish society's sashimi kit.stick cooked butterflied king prawns on each nigiri rice ball
  5. Present the nigiri sushi with the topping facing up. However, advise your guests that nigiri sushi should be eaten topping side down to get the best out of the flavours. I advise: - eat it all in one to avoid the mess 🙂sushi rice topped with butterflied king prawns
  6.  

💭 Recipe tips

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.

Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.

Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.

Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.

Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. For nigiri sushi choose veg or fruit that can be cut to the shape of the rice ball so it can sit neatly on top. Some ideas: Avocado (toss in lime juice), mango, bell pepper, cucumber ribbons.

Wasabi: Use wasabi paste to help stick your butterflied prawns/fish/veg to your sushi balls when making nigiri sushi

Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.

Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.

Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

For more recipes with fish try fish pie, salmon and prawn linguine, fish biryani, healthy fish and chips, frozen salmon and potato traybake, haddock risotto and Chinese prawns recipe.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment and star rating below. you can also pin the recipe on pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 45m to produce recipeUnder 200 calories recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

nigiri sushi with butterflied prawns
Print

Nigiri Sushi

Nigiri sushi is simply a ball of sushi rice topped with cooked butterflied king prawns. Usual served without any raw fish this is a great option sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can’t stand uncooked fish. These easy sushi balls are quick to make and perfect for using up that last bit of rice.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Main Course, party food, starter, starter or main
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people (20 pieces of nigiri sushi)
Calories 196kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Cutting board for slicing veg and 1 cutting board for slicing raw fish
  • 1 Sharp non serrated knife
  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and spoon
  • Bowl of water (to keep your hands wet when handling rice)
  • A cloth to clean and tidy and wipe as you go
  • A platter for serving
  • Chop sticks for eating (optional- sushi is traditionally eaten with the fingers)

Ingredients

  • 300 g of prepared sushi rice
  • 20 cooked and butterflied king prawns
  • Wasabi paste

Instructions

  • First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe.
    cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  • Wet your hands then take a small handful of sushi rice and start to shape in your hands to create a round oblong shape.
    for nigiri sushi shape the rice into small oblong balls
  • Next add a pea sized amount of wasabi paste to the top of each rice ball and spread out evenly using a knife.
    spread wasabi paste on the top of each nigiri rice ball
  • Finally, stick a topping to each rice ball, here I have used butterflied king prawns, which came preprepared in the Fish society's sashimi kit. Feel free to use alternative toppings to suit your own taste.
    stick cooked butterflied king prawns on each nigiri rice ball
  • Present the nigiri sushi with the topping facing up. However, advise your guests that nigiri sushi should be eaten topping side down to get the best out of the flavours. I advise: - eat it all in one to avoid the mess 🙂
    nigiri sushi

Video

Notes

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.
Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.
Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.
Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.
Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. For nigiri sushi choose veg or fruit that can be cut to the shape of the rice ball so it can sit neatly on top. Some ideas: Avocado (toss in lime juice), mango, bell pepper, cucumber ribbons.
Wasabi: Use wasabi paste to help stick your butterflied prawns/fish/veg to your sushi balls when making nigiri sushi
Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.
Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.
Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.
Nigiri sushi nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 136g | Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 33.6g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 0.9g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 280mg | Potassium: 203.2mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 1.7g | Vitamin A: 68.2IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 43.6mg | Iron: 0.8mg

The post Nigiri Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/nigiri-sushi/feed/ 0
Maki Sushi https://properfoodie.com/maki-sushi/ https://properfoodie.com/maki-sushi/#respond Fri, 04 Oct 2019 17:14:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14274 Maki sushi is a smaller type of sushi where the fish a veg are in the middle of sushi rice (sumeshi) with a seaweed sheet (nori) wrapped around the outside. Here, I will show you how to make your own maki sushi at home with my simple step by step guide. [feast_advanced_jump_to] Maki sushi is...

Read More

The post Maki Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Maki sushi is a smaller type of sushi where the fish a veg are in the middle of sushi rice (sumeshi) with a seaweed sheet (nori) wrapped around the outside. Here, I will show you how to make your own maki sushi at home with my simple step by step guide.

maki sushi on black slate with one piece being dipped in soy sauce

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Maki sushi is one of the easier types of sushi roll to make yourself. So if you are making sushi for the first time, this is a good place to start. Maki sushi rolls are smaller and thinner than most other sushi and unlike California rolls and Dragon rolls the rice is on the inside with the seaweed on the outer edge.

Maki sushi is made with half a nori sheet and the filling can be just raw fish, just veg or both. As the maki sushi is small the inside shouldn’t be over filled, so spread the rice as thinly as possible and only use 2 pieces of veg or fish. If you want to use 3 fillings there is also a Futomaki which is the larger version of the maki sushi (2-2.5 inches wide). For this use a full sheet of nori.

🍣 Making sushi at home

For more detailed information, sushi making tips and a full list of what you will need for making your own sushi at home jump over to my full guide for sushi rolls. Also, have a look at how to make sushi rice and how you can make other types of sushi rolls including California rolls, dragon roll sushi and nigiri sushi.

six pieces of maki sushi with 3 different fillings

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe

To make 36 pieces of maki sushi you will need the following:

  • 300g cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 3 sheets of nori (seaweed sheets)
  • ¼ cucumber sliced into thin sticks
  • ½ bell pepper sliced into thin sticks
  • ½ avocado sliced thinly
  • 120g Sushi grade fish (optional) (tuna, salmon, cod). See my full sushi rolls guide for more information on sushi grade fish

Substitutions: The fish and veg filling can be swapped to suit your taste. Try with other vegetables such as raw carrot, raw beetroot, raw red cabbage, celery. If you want to add some sashimi (raw, thinly sliced sushi grade fish). Try with this Sashimi Kit from The Fish Society . (Includes 60g+ Saba Mackerel, 60g+ Gindara Black cod, 60g+ Maguro tuna, 60g+ Chalkstripe salmon belly, 60g+ butterflied king prawns, soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks.

🔪 Instructions

  1. Rice: First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe
  2. Set up your working area: Bamboo mat ready to roll your sushi, bowl of water to keep your hands wet, sliced fish and veg, bowl of prepared sushi rice, and sheets of nori.nori sheet in centre of bamboo mat
  3. Half a nori sheet: First, start by halving the nori paper (maki sushi is a smaller roll so only half is required).for maki sushi fold and cut the sheet of nori in half
  4. Spread the rice: Next use the water to wet your hands before handling the sushi rice. Take a golf ball sized amount of sushi rice, shape into a ball then place in the centre of the nori. Wet your hands again and then begin to spread the rice ball over the surface of the nori, leaving a 1 cm gap at the top. The rice should be as thin as possible, aim for 1 to 2 grains thickness across the sheet.spread the rice thinly and evenly leaving a boarder at the top edge
  5. Add the filling: Next place lines of veg or fish filling across the rice, this should be towards the bottom edge, about 2cms up. Because maki sushi is so small, you shouldn’t use more than 2 fillings, and in some cases just one is fine. Here I have used 1 fish filling (tuna) and 1 veg filling (avocado).Add your fish and vegatable strips to the top of the rice
  6. Now its time to roll the sushi: Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. The first roll you should be aiming to get the bottom end over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side.use the bamboo mat to start rolling and folding your maki sushi
  7. Slice: To finish slice the sushi roll into six maki sushi using a wet knife. Dip the knife into the water then hold up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed. To keep things neat slice and discard the ends.use a wet knife the slice the maki sushi into 6
  8. Repeat: Repeat the above with the remaining ingredients. Present sushi side on, so the inside is visiblesliced maki sushi

💭 Tips and tricks

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.

Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.

Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.

Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.

Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.

Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.

small sushi: Maki sushi are smaller rolls so halve your seaweed paper to make these.

Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the seaweed sheet. Spread as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.

Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking.

Slicing: When slicing sushi with rice on the outer edge (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and help to keep its shape whilst you slice.

Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.

Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.

Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

Once you have made maki sushi you can start to branch out and make all kinds of sushi including California rolls, Dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. Make all four and present on a big platter to really impress your friends.

platter of sushi rolls

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment or star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 under 300 calories recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

maki sushi on a platter with one piece being dipped in soy sauce with chop sticks
Print

📋 Maki sushi

Maki sushi is a smaller type of sushi where the fish a veg are in the middle of sushi rice (sumeshi) with a seaweed sheet (nori) wrapped around the outside. Here, I will show you how to make your own maki sushi at home with my simple step by step guide.
Course Dinner, Main Course, party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 2 hours
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 4 people (36 pieces of sushi)
Calories 217kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Bamboo Rolling Mat (Makisu) or use baking paper
  • 1 Cutting board for slicing veg and 1 cutting board for slicing raw fish
  • 1 Sharp non serrated knife
  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and spoon
  • Bowl of water (to keep your hands wet when handling rice)
  • A cloth to clean and tidy and wipe as you go
  • A platter for serving
  • Chop sticks for eating (optional- sushi is traditionally eaten with the fingers)

Ingredients

  • 300 g cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 3 sheets of nori seaweed sheets
  • ¼ cucumber sliced into thin sticks
  • ½ bell pepper sliced into thin sticks
  • ½ avocado sliced thinly
  • 120 g Sushi grade fish optional (tuna, salmon, cod) see my full sushi guide for more information on sushi grade fish

Instructions

  • First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe
    cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  • Bamboo mat ready to roll your sushi, bowl of water to keep your hands wet, sliced fish and veg, bowl of prepared sushi rice, and sheets of nori.
    nori sheet in centre of bamboo mat
  • First, start by halving the nori paper (maki sushi is a smaller roll so only half is required).
    for maki sushi fold and cut the sheet of nori in half
  • Next use the water to wet your hands before handling the sushi rice. Take a golf ball sized amount of sushi rice, shape into a ball then place in the centre of the nori. Wet your hands again and then begin to spread the rice ball over the surface of the nori, leaving a 1 cm gap at the top. The rice should be as thin as possible, aim for 1 to 2 grains thickness across the sheet.
    spread the rice thinly and evenly leaving a boarder at the top edge
  • Next place lines of veg or fish filling across the rice, this should be towards the bottom edge, about 2cms up. Because maki sushi is so small, you shouldn’t use more than 2 fillings, and in some cases just one is fine. Here I have used 1 fish filling (tuna) and 1 veg filling (avocado).
    Add your fish and vegatable strips to the top of the rice
  • Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. The first roll you should be aiming to get the bottom end over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side.
    use the bamboo mat to start rolling and folding your maki sushi
  • To finish slice the sushi roll into six maki sushi using a wet knife. Dip the knife into the water then hold up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed. To keep things neat slice and discard the ends.
    use a wet knife the slice the maki sushi into 6
  • Repeat the above with the remaining ingredients. Present sushi side on so the inside is visible.
    sliced maki sushi

Video

Notes

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.
Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.
Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.
Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.
Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.
Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.
Small sushi: Maki sushi are smaller rolls so halve your seaweed paper to make these.
Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the seaweed sheet. Spread as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.
Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking.
Slicing: When slicing sushi with rice on the outer edge (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and help to keep its shape whilst you slice.
Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.
Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.
Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.
maki rolls nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 164g | Calories: 217kcal | Carbohydrates: 34.5g | Protein: 8.8g | Fat: 5.6g | Saturated Fat: 1.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.2g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 320.8mg | Fiber: 0.6g | Sugar: 2.3g | Vitamin A: 45.6IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 18.7mg | Iron: 0.6mg

The post Maki Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/maki-sushi/feed/ 0
Dragon Roll Sushi https://properfoodie.com/dragon-roll-sushi/ https://properfoodie.com/dragon-roll-sushi/#respond Tue, 25 Feb 2020 16:08:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14315 Dragon roll sushi is a California roll with thin slices of avocado and salmon lay on the top and following the curve of the roll. In this sushi guide I'll show you how easy it is to perfect the dragon roll at home. [feast_advanced_jump_to] The dragon roll is one of the more impressive pieces of...

Read More

The post Dragon Roll Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Dragon roll sushi is a California roll with thin slices of avocado and salmon lay on the top and following the curve of the roll. In this sushi guide I'll show you how easy it is to perfect the dragon roll at home.

Dragon roll with avocado and salmon slices on the top

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

The dragon roll is one of the more impressive pieces of sushi and not only does it boast rice on the outside but it also has a topping. The topping is usually avocado, which is said to resemble that of a dragon scale. In this guide I used salmon as well as avocado for a bit of extra colour in the topping.

🍣 Making sushi at home

For more detailed information, sushi making tips and a full list of what you will need for making your own sushi at home jump over to my full guide for sushi rolls. Also, have a look at how to make sushi rice and how you can make other types of sushi rolls including maki sushi, California rolls and nigiri sushi.

dragon roll sushi side on and from above

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients and recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make 30 pieces of Dragon roll sushi you will need the following:

  • 600g of cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 1 pack nori sheets (5 in a pack) (seaweed sheets)
  • Black sesame seeds
  • ½ cucumber sliced into this julienne sticks for filling
  • 5 crab sticks sliced in half length ways for filling
  • 1 avocado sliced thinly for filling (toss in lime juice to keep fresh)
  • 1 avocado thinly sliced for topping (toss in lime juice to keep fresh)
  • 250g sliced smoked salmon or sliced sashimi salmon for topping

Substitutions: The fish and veg filling can be swapped to suit your taste. Try with other vegetables such as bell pepper, celery, raw carrot, raw beetroot, raw red cabbage. Or if you want to add some sashimi (raw, thinly sliced fish). Try with this Sashimi Kit from The Fish Society . (Includes 60g+ Saba Mackerel, 60g+ Gindara Black cod, 60g+ Maguro tuna, 60g+ Chalkstripe salmon belly, 60g+ butterflied king prawns, soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks.

🔪 Instructions

  1. First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipecooked sushi rice in a bowl
  2. Next make a California roll following steps 1 to 7 in this California rolls recipecover the california roll with cling film before slicing
  3. Then, before slicing the roll add a topping of avocado, or avocado and salmon, or anything else you want to try. Slightly overlap each topping as you go.top the california roll with avovadoc and salmon to make it a dragon roll
  4. Place cling film over to shape and stick the topping to the sushi roll.cover dragon roll with cling film to shape and press the topping to the roll
  5. Slice the dragon roll into 6, you can leave the cling film on or take it off to do this, – which ever you prefer. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.wet knife and slice the dragon roll into 6, with or without cling film on
  6. Present the dragon rolls with the the topping facing updragon roll

💭 Recipe tips

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.

Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.

Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.

Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.

Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.

Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.

Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the seaweed sheet. Spread as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.

Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking.

Slicing: When slicing sushi with rice on the outer edge (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and help to keep its shape whilst you slice.

Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.

Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.

Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

Let me know what you thought of this recipe by leaving a comment or star rating below. you can also pin the recipe on pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 under 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

four pieces of sushi with slices of salmon and avocado on the top to mimic a dragon
Print

📋 Dragon Roll Sushi

Dragon roll sushi is a California roll with thin slices of avocado and salmon lay on the top and following the curve of the roll. In this sushi guide I'll show you how easy it is to perfect the dragon roll at home.
Course Appetizer, christmas dinner, Main Course, party food, starter or main
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 2 hours
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 4 people (30 pieces of sushi)
Calories 475kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Bamboo Rolling Mat (Makisu) or use baking paper
  • 1 Cutting board for slicing veg and 1 cutting board for slicing raw fish
  • 1 Sharp non serrated knife
  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and spoon
  • Bowl of water (to keep your hands wet when handling rice)
  • A cloth to clean and tidy and wipe as you go
  • A platter for serving
  • Chop sticks for eating (optional- sushi is traditionally eaten with the fingers)

Ingredients

  • 600 g of cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 1 pack nori sheets 5 in a pack (seaweed sheets)
  • Black sesame seeds
  • ½ cucumber sliced into this julienne sticks for filling
  • 5 crab sticks sliced in half length ways for filling
  • 1 avocado sliced thinly for filling toss in lime juice to keep fresh
  • 1 avocado thinly sliced for topping toss in lime juice to keep fresh
  • 250 g sliced smoked salmon or sliced sashimi salmon for topping

Instructions

  • First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe
    cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  • Next make a California roll following steps 1 to 7 in this California rolls recipe. Substitute in your preferred fillings.
    cover the california roll with cling film before slicing
  • Then, before slicing the roll add a topping of avocado, or avocado and salmon, or anything else you want to try. Slightly overlap each topping as you go.
    top the california roll with avovadoc and salmon to make it a dragon roll
  • Place cling film over to shape and stick the topping to the sushi roll.
    cover dragon roll with cling film to shape and press the topping to the roll
  • Slice the dragon roll into 6, you can leave the cling film on or take it off to do this, – which ever you prefer. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.
    wet knife and slice the dragon roll into 6, with or without cling film on
  • Present the dragon rolls with the the topping facing up
    dragon roll

Video

Notes

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.
Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.
Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.
Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish. Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.
Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.
Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the seaweed sheet. Spread as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.
Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking.
Slicing: When slicing sushi with rice on the outer edge (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and help to keep its shape whilst you slice.
Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.
Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.
Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.
dragon roll nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 287g | Calories: 475kcal | Carbohydrates: 66.8g | Protein: 21.1g | Fat: 15.3g | Saturated Fat: 3.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6.9g | Sodium: 880mg | Potassium: 636.1mg | Fiber: 1.2g | Sugar: 2.6g | Vitamin A: 89.8IU | Vitamin C: 3.1mg | Calcium: 38.7mg | Iron: 1.2mg

The post Dragon Roll Sushi appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/dragon-roll-sushi/feed/ 0
California rolls https://properfoodie.com/california-rolls/ https://properfoodie.com/california-rolls/#respond Tue, 21 Jul 2020 16:11:14 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14207 California rolls with salmon, avocado and cucumber. This simple step by step guide will show you how to make your own California sushi rolls at home. Usually served without raw fish, this sushi roll is a great option for sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can't stand uncooked fish. [feast_advanced_jump_to] The great thing about making...

Read More

The post California rolls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
California rolls with salmon, avocado and cucumber. This simple step by step guide will show you how to make your own California sushi rolls at home. Usually served without raw fish, this sushi roll is a great option for sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can't stand uncooked fish.

sushi roll with rice on the outside on a black slate platter

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

The great thing about making your own sushi rolls is that you can fill them with whatever ingredients you like and whatever suits you and your family best. Keep it vegetarian, go all out with some lovely sushi grade raw fish, or 'play it safe' and use smoked salmon or crab sticks.

California rolls typically contain cucumber, avocado and crabsticks. This is easy on the palate and also looks very pretty with the bright pinks and greens. In this particular recipe I opted for smoked salmon instead of crabsticks. But feel free to use whatever filling you prefer.

🍣 Making sushi at home

For more detailed information, sushi making tips and a full list of what you will need for making your own sushi at home jump over to my full guide for sushi rolls. Also, have a look at how to make sushi rice and how you can make other types of sushi rolls including maki sushi, dragon roll sushi and nigiri sushi.

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make 40 pieces of California roll sushi you will need the following:

  • 600g of cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 1 pack nori sheets (5 in a pack) (seaweed sheets)
  • Black sesame seeds
  • ½ cucumber sliced into this julienne sticks
  • 1 avocado thinly sliced (toss in lime juice to keep fresh)
  • 250g smoked salmon or 5 crab sticks

Substitutions: The fish and veg filling can be swapped to suit your taste. Try with other vegetables such as bell pepper, celery, raw carrot, raw beetroot, raw red cabbage. Or if you want to add some sashimi (raw, thinly sliced fish). Try with this Sashimi Kit from The Fish Society . (Includes 60g+ Saba Mackerel, 60g+ Gindara Black cod, 60g+ Maguro tuna, 60g+ Chalkstripe salmon belly, 60g+ butterflied king prawns, soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks.

California rolls sushi and nigiri sushi

🔪 Instructions

  1. Rice: First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe
  2. Set up your working area: 1 bamboo mat ready to roll your sushi, a bowl of water to keep your hands wet whilst handling sushi rice, sliced fish and veg, bowl of prepared sushi rice, and 5 sheets of nori. seaweed sheet in centre of bamboo mat
  3. Each roll is made with 1 sheet of nori: Place the nori, shiny side down, on the top of your bamboo mat. Wet your hands and take a snooker ball amount of rice and place in the centre of the seaweed sheet. Then wet your hands again and start to spread thinly and evenly over the nori. Leaving a 2cm gap at the top. Aim for 2-3 grains thick.thin layer of rice on rough side of seaweed sheet
  4. Sesame seeds: At this point if you wish, you can sprinkle over black sesame and or black onion seeds.black sesame seed on top of rice for california roll
  5. Flip over: The nori and rice must now be flipped over. The rice will stay stuck to the nori so don’t worry. Pick up the top end and flip over from top to bottom.flip over rice and nori so rice is on the underside
  6. Filling: The fish and veg filling can be placed on top of the seaweed sheet, around 2cm up from the bottom. As this is a larger sushi roll (compared to maki sushi) up to 3 fillings can be used. Here I have used salmon, cucumber and avocado.line up veg and fish on the nori
  7. Now, its time to roll: Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. For the first roll you should be aiming to get the bottom end over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side.use the mat to start rolling the sushi roll
  8. Before slicing the California roll: cover with cling film and press to the shape. You can place the mat back over the roll to do this. Then remove mat but leave cling film in place for slicing.cover the California roll before slicing
  9. Slicing: Next, wet your knife by dipping the blade into the water. Then hold the knife up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice the roll into six or eight pieces. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking.slice into 8 california rolls
  10. Repeat: Repeat with the remaining ingredients
  11. Serve: Present the sliced California rolls with the inside facing up and serve on a platter.Present the rolls on their sides

💭 Tips and tricks

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.

Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.

Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.

Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.

Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.

Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.

Protect your mat: Wrap your bamboo mat with cling film to keep it clean, particularly when making California rolls when the rice is on the outer edge.

Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the seaweed sheet. Spread as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.

Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking.

Slicing: When slicing sushi with rice on the outer edge (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and help to keep its shape whilst you slice.

Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.

Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.

Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment or star rating below. You can also pin the recipe or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 2hr15m to produce recipeHigh protein recipeunder 500 kcal recipe

📖 Recipe

california rolls served on a black slate platter with a pair of chopsticks
Print

📋 California rolls

California rolls with salmon, avocado and cucumber. This simple step by step guide will show you how to make your own California sushi rolls at home. Usually served without raw fish, this sushi roll is a great option for sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can't stand uncooked fish.
Course Appetizer, Main Course, party food, Side Dish, Snack, starter
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 2 hours
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 4 people (40 pieces of sushi)
Calories 451.3kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Bamboo Rolling Mat (Makisu) or use baking paper
  • 1 Cutting board for slicing veg and 1 cutting board for slicing raw fish
  • 1 Sharp non serrated knife
  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and spoon
  • Bowl of water (to keep your hands wet when handling rice)
  • A cloth to clean and tidy and wipe as you go
  • A platter for serving
  • Chop sticks for eating (optional- sushi is traditionally eaten with the fingers)

Ingredients

  • 600 g of cooked and prepared sushi rice
  • 1 pack nori sheets 5 in a pack (seaweed sheets)
  • Black sesame seeds
  • ½ cucumber sliced into this julienne sticks
  • 1 avocado thinly sliced toss in lime juice to keep fresh
  • 250 g smoked salmon or 5 crab sticks

Instructions

  • First prepare the rice by following the instructions in this how to make sushi rice recipe
    cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  • 1 bamboo mat ready to roll your sushi, a bowl of water to keep your hands wet whilst handling sushi rice, sliced fish and veg, bowl of prepared sushi rice, and 5 sheets of nori (seaweed).
    nori sheet in centre of bamboo mat
  • Place the nori, shiny side down, on the top of your bamboo mat. Wet your hands and take a snooker ball amount of rice and place in the centre of the seaweed sheet. Then wet your hands again and start to spread thinly and evenly over the nori, leaving a 2cm gap at the top of the seaweed. Aim for 2-3 grains thick.
    thin layer of rice on rough side or nori sheet
  • At this point if you wish, you can sprinkle over black sesame and or black onion seeds.
    black sesame seed on top of rice for california roll
  • The nori and rice must now be flipped over. The rice will stay stuck to the nori so don’t worry. Pick up the top end and flip over from top to bottom.
    flip over rice and nori so rice is on the underside
  • The fish and veg filling can be placed on top of the seaweed sheet around 2cm up from the bottom. As this is a larger sushi roll (compared to maki sushi) up to 3 fillings can be used. Here I have used salmon, cucumber and avocado.
    line up veg and fish on the nori
  • Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. For the first roll you should be aiming to get the bottom end over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side.
    use bamboo mat to start rolling and tightening the sushi roll
  • Cover with cling film and press to the shape of the sushi roll. You can place the mat back over the roll to do this. Then remove mat for slicing.
    cover the california roll with cling film before slicing
  • Next, wet your knife by dipping into the water then hold the knife up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice the roll into six or eight pieces (depending on how thick you would like them). Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.
    wet knife and slice through the cling film and into 8 california rolls
  • Repeat with the remaining ingredients
  • Present the sliced California rolls with the inside facing up and serve on a platter.
    remove the cling film and present the rolls on their sides

Video

Notes

Rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.
Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don’t have to use a bamboo mat. If you can’t get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.
Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you’ll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.
Sushi grade fish: If using raw fish I'd suggesting using fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw. See my full guide on sushi rolls for further details on freezing fish and sushi grade fish.
Sashimi kit: If using raw fish I'd suggest buying a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi). I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used for making all of my sushi recipes. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.
Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.
Protect your mat: Wrap your bamboo mat with cling film to keep it clean, particularly when making California rolls when the rice is on the outer edge.
Don't use too much rice: Try not to place too much rice on the nori sheet. Spread the rice as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top to allow room for sealing.
Knife: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.
Use cling film when slicing: When slicing sushi with rice outside (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. This will help to keep the roll together and to keep its shape whilst you slice.
Wrap and chill: Once your sushi are made, plate up cover and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.
Condiments: Serve with soy sauce, pickled ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.
Time!: Give yourself plenty of time! Don’t under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.
california rolls nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 274g | Calories: 451.3kcal | Carbohydrates: 66.6g | Protein: 20.9g | Fat: 12.9g | Saturated Fat: 2.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 880mg | Potassium: 579.8mg | Fiber: 1.2g | Sugar: 2.5g | Vitamin A: 89.5IU | Vitamin C: 2.4mg | Calcium: 37.3mg | Iron: 1.2mg

The post California rolls appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/california-rolls/feed/ 0
Homemade Sushi Rolls (Step-by-Step Guide, Recipe Tips & Video) https://properfoodie.com/sushi-rolls/ https://properfoodie.com/sushi-rolls/#comments Tue, 04 Jun 2019 12:03:35 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10365 How to make homemade sushi rolls with my easy to follow, step-by-step guide and recipe video. Get my top tips and tricks and watch the video for making sushi at home. Including how to make sushi rice, maki sushi, California rolls, dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. Plus find out about the fantastic sushi kit I...

Read More

The post Homemade Sushi Rolls (Step-by-Step Guide, Recipe Tips & Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
How to make homemade sushi rolls with my easy to follow, step-by-step guide and recipe video. Get my top tips and tricks and watch the video for making sushi at home. Including how to make sushi rice, maki sushi, California rolls, dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. Plus find out about the fantastic sushi kit I used to make this wonderful sushi platter.

AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY

Homemade sushi rolls on a platter

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Making sushi at home is one of those challenges that can be very satisfying, especially once you get the hang of it and start to feel like a real sushi pro.

The great thing about homemade sushi rolls is that you are in full control of the ingredients. Make your sushi with or without fish, make it vegetarian or vegan, and pick your favourite fruit and vegetables for fillings. Making sushi at home is also a lot of fun, especially if you get friends and family involved. The other benefit is that homemade sushi is always going to be far cheaper than in a restaurant and most of the ingredients will keep well in the cupboard ready for your next sushi making night.

In this guide I will walk you through the whole sushi making process. From what ingredients and equipment you need to how to roll and slice into perfect sushi pieces.

🍽 What equipment do I need?

As complex as homemade sushi may appear, only minimal equipment is required for making an impressive platter:

  • Bamboo Rolling Mat (Makisu) or you can use baking paper (Bamboo mat helps create a tighter roll with better shape)
  • 1 cutting board for slicing veg and 1 cutting board for slicing raw fish
  • A sharp, non serrated knife
  • Pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and spoon for mixing the rice and sushi vinegar
  • Bowl of water (very important for handling rice and for slicing the sushi)
  • Cling film (Saran wrap)
  • A cloth to clean and tidy and wipe as you go
  • A platter for serving
  • Chop sticks for eating (optional) - sushi is traditionally eaten with the fingers.
homemade sushi rolls

🥘 Ingredients

Jump straight to Recipe Card

The below will be enough to make a full platter (serves 4) of different types of homemade sushi or if you prefer a platter of one type of sushi. See further down the post for links to making different types of sushi.

  • 2 Packs of Nori sheets (10 sheets) (seaweed sheets)
  • 300g uncooked Sushi rice (Nishiki)
  • 400ml tap water for cooking rice
  • 2 tablespoon Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Mirin rice wine
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • ½ teaspoon Salt
  • Thinly sliced julienne sticks of your choice of fruits and vegetables, plus avocado if desired (toss sliced avocado in lime juice to keep it fresh). - I used 1 cucumber, 1 red bell pepper, and 1 Avocado.
  • Black sesame seeds or black onion seeds (for inside out rolls - meaning rice on the outside e.g. California rolls)
  • Crab sticks or crab meat
  • Your choice of raw sushi grade fish (see FAQs below for explanation). For ease I highly recommend this Sashimi Kit  from The Fish society, which includes a guaranteed 300g total weight of raw sushi grade fish, ready to slice into sashimi. Fish selection includes: frozen raw mackerel, black cod, maguro tuna, salmon belly and cooked, butterflied king prawns. Plus soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks. I also bought crab sticks to add to this. The fish society also have individual fish options available for sashimi if you'd rather choose specific types of fish yourself.

Fruit and veg filling ideas: cucumber, bell pepper, jalapeños, red cabbage, celery, spring onion, beetroot, radish, avocado, mango, pineapple, apple, pear.

Sushi without raw fish: If you don't want to use raw fish, other options you can try are cooked crab meat, crabsticks, tinned tuna, smoked salmon, or smoked mackerel.

Sushi without fish: If you don't want to use fish at all just load up with fruit and veg. You could also try with cream cheese or tofu. Cream cheese, cucumber and chives is a great option.

Toppings: Once the rolls are made you can add extra flavour with toppings like pickled ginger, soy sauce, wasabi paste, sesame seeds, onion seeds, chia seeds, extra thin slices of avocado or fish (see dragon roll sushi recipe), butterflied king prawns (see nigiri sushi recipe) chopped mango, thinly sliced spring onion or salmon roe.

Homemade sushi rolls on a platter with one California roll being picked up with chopsticks

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Make the sushi rice: Rice that is specifically prepared for sushi is called Sumeshi. This means rice thats cooked for the right amount of time, in the right amount of water with the right amount of seasoning. It should be sticky but still al dente, shiny and not mashed together. To make perfect sushi rice follow the instructions in my how to make sushi rice guide.cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  2. Julienne the vegetables: Slice your chosen fruit and vegetable fillings into thin sticks, of a similar size (julienne).Slice vegetables into thin julienne sticks
  3. Slice the fish: If the fish is frozen, thoroughly defrost before use, either at room temperature for a few hours or overnight in the fridge. Next, slice the fish into thin sashimi pieces, going against the grain (lines in the fish). Store sliced fish in the fridge if you aren't ready to use it right away.Slice the raw fish into thin sashimi pieces
  4. Fill with rice: Place a nori seaweed sheet on the bamboo mat (shiny side down). Wet your hands then spread the rice over the seaweed leaving a 1-2 cm gap at the top (for sealing the roll). Use half a sheet of seaweed or a full sheet depending on how big you would like your sushi. Usually half a sheet is used to make maki sushi and a full sheet is used for California rolls and Dragon roll sushi.spread the rice thinly and evenly leaving a boarder at the top edge
  5. Add fillings: Add your choice of veg and fish fillings. Line up the filling across the seaweed. If making a smaller roll, with half a seaweed sheet, then use just 2 fillings. If you are making a larger roll and using a full seaweed sheet then you can add 3 fillings. Image here shows smaller roll with 2 fillings of raw tuna and avocado.Add your fish and vegatable strips to the top of the rice
  6. Roll: Use the bamboo mat to roll up the sushi. Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. The first roll you should be aiming to get the nori and rice over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side of the mat. use the bamboo mat to start rolling and folding your maki sushi
  7. Slice: To finish slice the sushi roll using a wet knife. To wet your knife dip the tip of the blade into water then hold the knife up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.use a wet knife the slice the maki sushi into 6
  8. Repeat: Repeat with the remaining seaweed, rice and fillings. Then serve up on a platter with your chosen toppings.sliced maki sushi
  9. Different types of sushi: Different types of sushi can be made from the same ingredients. See below for a description of each type of sushi and a link to the recipe.sushi platter

🍱 What are the different kinds of sushi rolls?

In this guide I will show you how to make 4 types of sushi. Three are sushi that are rolled and the the other is balls of sushi with a topping. Below I will go over each type of sushi and provide a link to the recipe for making each one:

  1. Maki sushi (small roll)
  2. California rolls (large roll)
  3. Dragon roll sushi (large roll)
  4. Nigiri sushi (ball of rice with topping)

🍥 Maki sushi rolls

Maki sushi is the smallest rolled sushi and is made using half of a nori sheet, instead of a full sheet. The nori sheet is on the outside of this roll and the rice and veg are in the middle. Maki sushi can be made with just raw fish, just veg or both. As the maki sushi is small the inside shouldn't be over filled, so spread the rice as thinly as possible and only use 2 pieces of veg or fish. There is also a Futomaki which is the larger version of the maki sushi (2-2.5 inches wide).

📋 Maki sushi
Maki sushi is a smaller type of sushi where the fish a veg are in the middle of sushi rice (sumeshi) with a seaweed sheet (nori) wrapped around the outside. Here, I will show you how to make your own maki sushi at home with my simple step by step guide.
Make this recipe
maki sushi on a platter with one piece being dipped in soy sauce with chop sticks
maki sushi on a platter with one piece being dipped in soy sauce with chop sticks

🍥 California rolls

California rolls are larger then the maki sushi and use the whole sheet of nori. The rice for this roll is presented on the outside and the seaweed is rolled into the inside. The veg and fish are in the middle, just like in the maki sushi. As the California roll is larger than the maki roll there is room to use 3 veg/fish fillings inside. But its still a good idea to keep the layer of rice as thin as possible.

📋 California rolls
California rolls with salmon, avocado and cucumber. This simple step by step guide will show you how to make your own California sushi rolls at home. Usually served without raw fish, this sushi roll is a great option for sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can't stand uncooked fish.
Make this recipe
california rolls served on a black slate platter with a pair of chopsticks
california rolls served on a black slate platter with a pair of chopsticks

🍥 Dragon roll sushi

Dragon roll sushi are exactly the same as California rolls except they have a topping. The topping is usual avocado and is said to resemble that of a dragon scale, which is where the name came from. In this guide I used salmon as well as avocado for the topping.

📋 Dragon Roll Sushi
Dragon roll sushi is a California roll with thin slices of avocado and salmon lay on the top and following the curve of the roll. In this sushi guide I'll show you how easy it is to perfect the dragon roll at home.
Make this recipe
four pieces of sushi with slices of salmon and avocado on the top to mimic a dragon
four pieces of sushi with slices of salmon and avocado on the top to mimic a dragon

🍣 Nigiri sushi

Nigiri sushi is a non-roll sushi and probably the easiest to make. First an oblong ball of sushi rice is formed using your hands. Then a topping is added - usually cooked, butterflied king prawns, which are stuck onto the rice with a bit of wasabi paste. But you can use other types of fish or veg to top your nigiri. If you're being extra adventurous and looking for extra marks for presentation have a go at wrapping a thin strip of nori around the nigiri sushi.

Nigiri Sushi
Nigiri sushi is simply a ball of sushi rice topped with cooked butterflied king prawns. Usual served without any raw fish this is a great option sushi-newbies, kids, and anyone who really can’t stand uncooked fish. These easy sushi balls are quick to make and perfect for using up that last bit of rice.
Make this recipe
nigiri sushi with butterflied prawns
nigiri sushi with butterflied prawns

💭 Tips and tricks

After having spent several hours perfecting my sushi making skills, here are my pearls of wisdom and sushi making tips:

Different sushi rolls: For that real wow factor have a go at making a variety of homemade sushi rolls. The amounts of ingredients listed in this guide will be enough to make a platter with several different sushi rolls. This guide includes links to recipes for maki sushi, California rolls, dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. All together they make a fabulous looking platter.

Sushi rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.

Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don't have to use a bamboo mat. If you can't get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.

Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you'll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.

Sushi grade fish: Use fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw.

Sashimi kit: Buy a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi) . I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used to make this platter. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.

Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.

Protect your mat: Wrap your bamboo mat with cling film to keep it clean, particularly when making California rolls when the rice is on the outside of the roll.

Try not to overfill the nori sheet with rice: Spread the rice as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top end of the nori to allow room for sealing.

Small rolls: Maki sushi are smaller rolls so halve your seaweed paper to make these.

Slicing: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.

When slicing sushi with rice on the outside (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. The cling film will help to keep the roll together and to keep its shape whilst you slice.

Wasabi: Use wasabi paste to help stick your butterflied prawns to your sushi balls when making nigiri sushi

Chill the sushi: Once your sushi are made, plate up then wrap in cling film and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.

Serve with: soy sauce, pickle ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity.

Time: Give yourself plenty of time! Don't under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

❓ Frequently asked questions

🦑 Is it safe to eat raw fish?

Raw fish does come with a higher risk than when fish is cooked. However, if raw fish is fresh, stored correctly and prepared correctly, then it is safe to eat. Certain types of fish are recommended for eating raw. This includes fish that lives in cooler water, certain types of farmed fish and fish that is frozen to below -4 degrees C soon after catching. The cooler waters and freezing of the fish kills any bacteria and parasites, so making it a lot safer to consume raw. However, people at higher risk of food borne illnesses should always avoid any kind of consumption of raw fish. Higher risk people include those with low immune systems, pregnant women, infants, young children and older adults. Always check with your GP if you are in any way unsure and have a read of this NHS page about sushi for further info.
 

🦀 What is sushi grade fish?

Sushi grade fish means fish that has been prepared and stored in such a way that it is considered safe to eat raw. These practices include freezing below a certain temperature for certain lengths of time. The Food standards agency provides full details on how to freeze fish that is intended to be consumed raw.

🍚 Which rice is best for sushi rolls?

Most shops and supermarkets will sell bags of rice that are labelled as sushi rice. I highly recommend using the rice that is labelled as sushi rice otherwise you run the risk of using a type that won't be sticky enough when cooked. If you struggle to find 'sushi rice' look for a medium grained white rice, usually named Nishiki.

👩🏻‍🍳 Is it hard to make sushi rolls?

Making sushi for the first time can be quite a challenge, which is why I have put together this easy to follow guide and step by step video. I would suggest having enough ingredients for a couple of practice sushi rolls.

🐟 Other fish recipes you may like:

Clam chowder, fish biryani, honey glazed prawns, Chinese prawns recipe, salmon and prawn linguine, haddock and rosemary risotto, Frozen salmon and potato traybake, Kedgeree, cucumber canapes with prawns, and Fish pie. Or for more dinner inspiration have a look at my dinner ideas for two collection.

I do hope your find this guide of use in your sushi making journey. let me know what you think by leaving a comment and star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on Pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video. Happy sushi making!!

under 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipe 

📖 Recipe

homemade sushi rolls platter
Print

📋 Homemade Sushi Rolls

Make homemade sushi rolls with my easy to follow, step-by-step guide and recipe video. Get my top tips and tricks and watch the video for making sushi at home. Including how to make sushi rice, maki sushi, California rolls, dragon rolls and nigiri sushi. Plus find out about the fantastic sushi kit I used to make this wonderful sushi platter.
The below will be enough to make a full platter (serves 4) of different sushi rolls or if you prefer a platter of one kind of sushi. See notes below for links to making a variety of homemade sushi rolls.
Course Appetizer, lunch, Snack, starter or main
Cuisine Japanese
Prep Time 2 hours
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 479.9kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 Packs of Nori sheets seaweed sheets
  • 300 g uncooked Sushi rice Nishiki
  • 400 ml tap water for cooking rice
  • 2 tablespoon Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Mirin rice wine
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • ½ teaspoon Salt
  • Thinly sliced julienne sticks of your choice of fruits and vegetables plus avocado if desired (toss sliced avocado in lime juice to keep it fresh). - I used 1 cucumber, 1 red bell pepper, and 1 Avocado.
  • Black sesame seeds or black onion seeds for inside out rolls - meaning rice on the outside e.g. California rolls
  • Crab sticks or crab meat
  • Your choice of raw sushi grade fish For ease I highly recommend this Sashimi Kit from The Fish society, which includes a guaranteed 300g total weight of raw sushi grade fish, ready to slice into sashimi. Fish selection includes: frozen raw mackerel, black cod, maguro tuna, salmon belly and cooked, butterflied king prawns. Plus soy sauce sachets, wasabi sachets, pickled ginger sachets and chop sticks). I also bought crab sticks to add to this. The fish society also have individual fish options available for sashimi if you'd rather choose specific types of fish yourself.

Instructions

  • Rice that is specifically prepared for sushi is called Sumeshi. This means rice thats cooked for the right amount of time, in the right amount of water with the right amount of seasoning. It should be sticky but still al dente, shiny and not mashed together. To make perfect sushi rice follow the instructions in my how to make sushi rice guide.
    cooked sushi rice in a bowl
  • Slice your chosen fruit and vegetable fillings into thin sticks, of a similar size (julienne).
    Slice vegetables into thin julienne sticks
  • If the fish is frozen, thoroughly defrost before use, either at room temperature for a few hours or overnight in the fridge. Next, slice the fish into thin sashimi pieces, going against the grain (lines in the fish). Store sliced fish in the fridge if you aren't ready to use it right away.
    Slice the raw fish into thin sashimi pieces
  • Place a nori seaweed sheet on the bamboo mat (shiny side down). Wet your hands then spread the rice over the seaweed leaving a 1-2 cm gap at the top (for sealing the roll). Use half a sheet of seaweed or a full sheet depending on how big you would like your sushi. Usually half a sheet is used to make maki sushi and a full sheet is used for California rolls and Dragon roll sushi.
    spread the rice thinly and evenly leaving a boarder at the top edge
  • Add your choice of veg and fish fillings. Line up the filling across the seaweed. If making a smaller roll with half a seaweed sheet then use just 2 fillings. If you are making a larger roll and using a full seaweed sheet then you can add 3 fillings. Image here shows smaller roll with 2 fillings of raw tuna and avocado.
    Add your fish and vegatable strips to the top of the rice
  • Use the bamboo mat to roll up the sushi. Pick up the bottom end of the mat and start to fold it over. The first roll you should be aiming to get the nori and rice over the fillings. Then lift the end of the mat up again and roll and tighten. Continue to roll until the sushi comes out at the other side of the mat.
    use the bamboo mat to start rolling and folding your maki sushi
  • To finish slice the sushi roll using a wet knife. To wet your knife dip the tip of the blade into water then hold the knife up and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. Slice firmly through the sushi, moving the blade back and forth so to cut and not to squash. Wet the blade between each slice to prevent the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed.
    use a wet knife the slice the maki sushi into 6
  • Repeat with the remaining seaweed, rice and fillings. Then serve up on a platter with your chosen toppings.
    sliced maki sushi
  • Different types of sushi can be made from the same ingredients. See notes below for a link to each type of sushi recipe.
    sushi platter

Video

Notes

Fruit and veg filling ideas: cucumber, bell pepper, jalapeños, red cabbage, celery, spring onion, beetroot, radish, avocado, mango, pineapple, apple, pear
Sushi without raw fish: If you don't want to use raw fish other options you can try are cooked crab meat, crabsticks, tinned tuna, smoked salmon, or smoked mackerel
Sushi without fish: If you don't want to use fish at all just load up with fruit and veg. You could also try with cream cheese or tofu. Cream cheese, cucumber and chives is a great option.
Toppings: Once the rolls are made you can add extra flavour with toppings like pickled ginger, soy sauce, wasabi paste, sesame seeds, onion seeds, chia seeds, extra thin slices of avocado or fish (see dragon roll sushi recipe), butterflied king prawns (see nigiri sushi recipe) chopped mango, thinly sliced spring onion or salmon roe.
Different sushi rolls: For that real wow factor have a go at making a variety of homemade  sushi rolls. The amounts of ingredients listed in this guide will be enough to make a platter with several different  sushi rolls. This guide includes links to recipes for maki sushi, California rolls, dragon roll sushi and nigiri sushi. All together they make a fabulous looking platter.
Sushi rice: To create the right kind of flavour mix your sushi rice with rice wine vinegar and mirin rice wine, sugar and salt.
Bamboo mat: Get yourself a Bamboo Rolling Mat. The sushi making process is made so much easier if you have a mat to help you roll and tighten your sushi rolls. However, you don't have to use a bamboo mat. If you can't get hold of one you can use baking paper to roll your sushi.
Water: Have a bowl of water on hand to keep your hands wet when handling the sushi rice. Sushi rice is extremely sticky and if your hands are dry you'll find it sticks to you rather than the seaweed. Things can get very messy very quickly.
Sushi grade fish: Use fish that has been frozen to below the right temperature for the correct amount of time, which will be a lot safer to consume raw.
Sashimi kit: Buy a sashimi kit that comes with a selection of sushi grade, frozen, raw fish ready for slicing into thin pieces (sashimi) . I highly recommend the sashimi kit from the Fish Society, which is what I used to make this platter. And there was some fish left over from this, so it goes a long way. This kit comes with 4 different types of frozen, raw fish, plus cooked, butterflied king prawns. The Fish society guarantees a total weight of 300g of sushi grade fish. The kit also includes sachets of soy sauce, sachets of wasabi, sachets of pickled ginger and 2 sets of wooden chop sticks.
Vegetables: If using veg instead of, or as well as fish, go for bright colours that will look pretty against the white rice. Also choose veg that will last and not go limp. Obvious choices include cucumber, bell pepper, carrot, raw beetroot, radish and red cabbage. I also love to use avocado, which I toss in lime juice immediately after slicing to stop it oxidising and going brown.
Protect your mat: Wrap your bamboo mat with cling film to keep it clean, particularly when making California rolls when the rice is on the outside of the roll.
Try not to overfill the nori sheet with rice: Spread the rice as thinly as possible over your nori sheet and leave a 2cm gap at the top end of the nori to allow room for sealing.
Small rolls: Maki sushi are smaller rolls so halve your seaweed paper to make these.
Slicing: Use a long blade, sharp, non serrated knife for slicing your sushi. Before slicing dip the knife blade in water and allow the water to run down the length of the blade. This stops the blade from sticking to the rice and seaweed. When slicing sushi with rice on the outside (California rolls) place cling film over your finished rolls first. The cling film will help to keep the roll together and to keep its shape whilst you slice.
Wasabi: Use wasabi paste to help stick your butterflied prawns to your sushi balls when making nigiri sushi
Chill the sushi: Once your sushi are made, plate up then wrap in cling film and chill in the fridge for at least an hour before serving. This will firstly keep the sushi nice and fresh but will also set the rice and make your sushi easier to handle and eat.
Serve with: soy sauce, pickle ginger and wasabi for that extra punch of flavour and touch of authenticity. Time: Give yourself plenty of time! Don't under estimate the mess this can make and the time it can take just to prepare your veg and fish alone.

Nutrition

Serving: 275g | Calories: 479.9kcal | Carbohydrates: 70g | Protein: 24.1g | Fat: 13.2g | Saturated Fat: 2.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2.9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6.2g | Sodium: 400mg | Fiber: 1.9g | Sugar: 4.2g

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to products I am recommending, which means if you click a link and then go on to purchase a product, I will receive a small percentage. This will not affect the amount you pay. 

The post Homemade Sushi Rolls (Step-by-Step Guide, Recipe Tips & Video) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/sushi-rolls/feed/ 4
Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/ https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/#comments Thu, 29 Oct 2020 01:37:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5236 No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to...

Read More

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roast pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a second bowl of soup in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasting a huge pumpkin and then turning it into soup is so, so satisfying, especially at this time of year when pumpkins are absolutely everywhere. With the nights drawing in and the weather turning colder its so nice to embrace the change and sit down to a warming bowl of homemade roast pumpkin soup.

Pumpkin and chestnuts are such a wonderful combination and it works so well here. Once the two ingredients have been roasted and then blended together they create a sweet and creamy flavour. A delightful earthiness comes from the pumpkin with a smokey taste in the background from the roast chestnuts.

🥘 Ingredients

To make this roast pumpkin soup for 4 people you will need:

The ingredients required to make spiced pumpkin soup, labelled with white text.

Ingredient notes

Pumpkin: The good old pumpkin is actually a type of winter squash and so any variety of winter squash will work well here. So if you're fresh out of pumpkins, substitute with butternut squash. Use either 2 small squash or 1 medium squash.

Alternatively, if you want to make this soup in double quick time, you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree.

Chestnuts: This recipe uses raw shelled chestnuts, which need to be roasted and the shells removed. See how to roast chestnuts for instructions. However, if you prefer you can buy and use pre cooked chestnuts with the shells removed (this will be quicker and easier, but I do enjoying roasting chestnuts myself at this time of year!)

If you can't get hold of any chestnuts, replace with nuts of a similar flavour such as hazelnuts or pecans.

Cream: The cream in this recipe is completely optional. I love to add it in right at the end to lighten up the soup and to make it super creamy. However, the chestnuts alone provide a creaminess to this soup. So if you want to keep things a little healthier, just remove the cream.

🔪 Step by step instructions

If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts.

  1. Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with a little oil
  2. Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  3. Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  4. Remove the roast pumpkin from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.A collage of four step by step images of how to make the first part of the pumpkin soup recipe. 1. prepare pumpkin, 2. roast pumpkin, 3. fry onions, 4. add roast pumpkin and chopped chestnuts to onions.
  5. Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  6. Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  7. Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth.
  8. Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.Second 4 step by step instruction images for making pumpkin soup: 5. add spices, 6. add stock, 7. blend, 8. add cream.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can this soup be frozen?

If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.

Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.

Why should I roast the pumpkin?

Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.

Can spices be added to this soup?

This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Pumpkin soup being ladled into a bowl

🍂 Other Autumn recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of pumpkin soup topped with a swirl of cream and a sprinkle of pumpkin seeds and parsley.
Print

Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts

No other recipe says autumn as much as this roasted pumpkin soup recipe. Its made with roast pumpkin flesh and roast chestnuts, which blend together to create a gorgeous, deep golden colour with a sweet and nutty taste. Make this soup in under an hour and enjoy all the goodness that autumn produce has to offer.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Soup, starter
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 552kcal

Equipment

  • Baking trays for roasting pumpkin and chestnuts
  • Extra large pan for making soup
  • Hand blender or blending machine

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon oil
  • 2 small or 1 medium pumpkin or 2 tins of pumpkin puree
  • 2 onions peeled and diced
  • 400 g raw shells on chestnuts or 200g cooked de-shelled chestnuts
  • 1 teaspoon oregano
  • 1 teaspoon sage
  • 2 vegetable stock cubes
  • Salt and pepper
  • 800 ml boiling water
  • 250 ml single cream
  • Pumpkin seeds and chopped parsley to serve

Instructions

  • If you are roasting your own chestnuts make sure you prepare these first before starting the recipe. See 'How to roast chestnuts' post. Alternatively use pre roasted and de shelled chestnuts. Roughly chop up roasted chestnuts before adding to the recipe.
  • Pre heat the oven to 200°C (400°F). Use a large knife to halve the pumpkin(s), then scoop out and discard the seeds. Place the pumpkin halves on a baking tray and rub the flesh with 1 tablespoon oil
  • Place the pumpkins into the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until soft. (Soft when a knife will easily press into the flesh)
  • Meanwhile, chop and fry onions in 1 tablespoon oil a large pan until soft. (TIP: use a large pan to give your self plenty of room for all the ingredients and then space to hand blend).
  • When the pumpkin is cooked, remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly then peel or slice off the skin. Chop up the pumpkin flesh and add to the onions along with chopped roasted chestnuts.
  • Next add the sage, oregano, stock cubes and salt and pepper.
  • Add around 800ml of boiled water to the pan then stir together well.
  • Use a hand blender or transfer the soup to a blending machine and blend until smooth. (Note: if soup needs reheating after blending, return to the pan and heat to a gentle simmer. Do not boil.)
  • Stir in the cream then serve with extra cream, pumpkin seeds and a sprinkle of parsley.

Notes

Substitutions:
  • Pumpkins can be replaced with any kind of winter squash or if you’re in a rush and don’t have time to roast the squash you can use 2 tins of pumpkin puree instead.
  • If you can’t get hold of raw chestnuts or don’t have the to roast them you an replace with re-cooked and shelled chestnuts. Or completely replace chestnuts with hazelnuts or pecans.
  • For a healthier version leave out the cream
 
Can this soup be frozen?
If you plan to freeze this soup, make sure to leave out the cream. Dairy products don't freeze and reheat well, so leave out the cream and add this in later when you have defrosted and reheated.
Once the soup is made (minus the cream) leave to cool then transfer to sealable containers and freeze for up to 3 months. Defrost on the side overnight the reheat in a pan over a low heat until just simmering. Do not boil.
Why should I roast the pumpkin?
Firstly, roasting pumpkin intensifies the flavour and caramelised the natural sugars in the flesh. Secondly, its far easier to remove the skin and slice up the flesh once roasted, rather than try to do it raw.
Can spices be added to this soup?
This recipe uses herbs and chestnuts. However, if you would prefer a spiced pumpkin soup recipe just replace the sage and oregano with coriander and cumin.

Nutrition

Serving: 500g | Calories: 552kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 2204mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 43218IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 192mg | Iron: 5mg

This post was first published in October 2017. Updated in October 2020 with an improved recipe, new images, new step-by-step photos and new recipe tips & FAQs.

The post Roast Pumpkin Soup with Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/pumpkin-soup-chestnuts-honey/feed/ 8
How To Roast Chestnuts https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/#respond Sun, 25 Oct 2020 17:13:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=16203 Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. This easy step by step guide will show you how to roast chestnuts at home without too much hassle or anguish. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Roasted chestnuts are as traditional as you can get when it comes to Christmas and food. There is something so delightful and christmassy about the woody, smokey smell that only roasted chestnuts create.

If you have ever wanted to roast your own chestnuts or wondered how to roast chestnuts then this step by step, easy recipe is for you. And by the way....its super simple!

🥘 Ingredients

Theres is nothing complicated or fancy about roasting chestnuts. You just need.....raw chestnuts with their shells on and a pan of water.

Ingredients for roast chestnuts: Bowl of chestnuts with shells on.

Ingredient notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Flatter chestnuts tend to be more difficult to cut and peel.

Amount of chestnuts: Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with. Therefore buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.

Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross. Then turn over and do the same on the other side.
  2. Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  3. Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  4. Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 1-4: 1. slice a cross into the shells, 2. place chestnuts in a pan with boiling water and simmer for 5 minutes, 3. transfer nuts to a tray and roast for 15 minutes, 4. leave to steam in a bowl covered with a towel.
  5. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  6. Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't peel or that appear to be bad.Images of how to roast chestnuts for steps 5-6: 5. Uncover chestnuts and check shells have started to open. 6. Peel and remove the shells discarding and that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.

💭 Expert tips

  • Score a cross in both sides of the chestnut shell. This ensures that the water gets in all around the nut and fully steams once in the oven. This will help when peeling.
  • When scoring in the crosses make sure to cut all the way through the shell and reach the kernel.
  • Once roasted, transfer the chestnuts to a bowl and cover immediately to trap the heat and continue the steaming process.

❓ Frequently asked questions

How to serve?

Roasted chestnuts are a fantastic snack and great to nibble on just as they are. Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting?

Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to peel the nuts.

How long do chestnuts last?

Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.

What else can you do with roasted chestnuts?

Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my roast pumpkin soup recipe.

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Bowl of roasted and peeled chestnuts with autumnal leaves lining the bowl.
Print

How To Roast Chestnuts

Cosy up with a tray of roasted chestnuts straight out of the oven. Prepared and roasted in just 30 minutes, this simple method will have you roasting chestnuts all throughout autumn and winter.
Course Snack
Cuisine British
Diet Diabetic, Gluten Free, Low Salt
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 392kcal

Equipment

  • Small sauce pan
  • Large bowl
  • Tea towel

Ingredients

  • 400 g raw chestnuts with shells on
  • Boiling water from the kettle

Instructions

  • The most important step in this process, before you do anything, is to slice into the chestnut shells. Use a serrated knife and firmly hold the nut between your thumb and fingers (making a bridge over the knife). Slice one way and then the other to create a cross in the shell. Then turn over and do the same on the other side. Repeat for all nuts.
  • Next place the prepared chestnuts into a small pan and cover with boiling water. Place on a medium heat and simmer gently for 5 minutes.
  • Drain the nuts and transfer to a tray then place in a preheated oven (200°C/392°F) and roast for 15 minutes.
  • Remove the nuts from the oven and transfer to a bowl. Cover with a towel and leave for 10 minutes to continue steaming. Uncover the bowl after 10 minutes and check that the shells are starting to open.
  • Peel and remove the shells, discarding any that won't de-shell or that appear to be bad.
  • Serve with the shells on or off and place in a brown paper bag for that extra touch of authenticity.

Notes

Chestnuts: Select chestnuts that are firm with a nice rounded shape. Buy double the amount of what you like to end up with.
(Once chestnuts are roasted and peeled and ones that won't peel or are bad have been discarded, you are left with around half the weight of what you started with).
Water: Simmering the chestnuts in water before roasting will help to separate the shells from the nut and will allow the chestnuts to steam once in the oven.
Do you have to soak chestnuts before roasting? Strictly speaking you don't have to soak and simmer chestnuts before roasting. However, skipping this step will make it much harder to remove the shells from the nuts.
Storage: Uncooked and unpeeled chestnuts will keep for 2-3 weeks when stored in a dry and well ventilated place. Cooked chestnuts should be stored in the fridge and will keep for 2-3 days.
What else can I do with roast chestnuts? Chestnuts can be a great addition to autumnal and winter dishes. Try in a salad or add to a stuffing mix. I also use roasted chestnuts in my spiced pumpkin soup recipe.

Nutrition

Serving: 150g | Calories: 392kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 968mg | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 80mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Roast Chestnuts appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-roast-chestnuts/feed/ 0
Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/ https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/#comments Thu, 16 Jun 2016 12:41:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1920 Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from...

Read More

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup

This Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup, with all its red veggie goodness, has been on our table several times over the last couple of weeks. I honestly can't get enough of it; with the intense flavour from the well-roasted peppers, mixed in with the sweetness from the tomatoes and the peppery anise from the basil. It really is a heavenly bowl of slurpful, deliciousness.

Rosted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup
Roasted Red Pepper and Tomato Soup

I decided it was time to get back into soup-making a few weekends ago, as summer is now here and I can no longer get away with hiding under huge jumpers and saying that I need that extra layer of fat to keep me warm. Yes its definitely time to trim up. I always find the best way to do this is with soups and salads. But only with the best and most tastiest soups and salads, otherwise i'd be straight back on the chocolate and chips in no time. So I intend to make my next few posts all about the summer trim down. (With the exception of the wedding cake post - Coming soon!!).

So if, like me, you are feeling the need to transform from a fat waddling caterpillar into a bright, floating butterfly then this soup is a good place to start. Its a really easy recipe and can be made in bulk for the fridge or freezer for those "no time!!" days.

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)
Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar (for the fridge - keep for 5 to 7 days)

Its also great to take to work or have as a snack if your feeling super peckish in between meals. And its more than likely a dish that will please everyone; from friends round for dinner to your children's mates starving after a long day at school.... lets face it most kids love tomato soup and this is the creme de la creme of tomato soups. Tomato soup was definitely my favourite as a child and I think the only thing thats changed is the topping, instead of grated cheese its now creme fraiche - so grown up 🙂

Right well I'm off to finish my sisters wedding cake - busy busy, hoping I can show the finished result soon!!

Happy soup making!!

📖 Recipe

Roasted Red pepper and Tomato soup in a Jar
Print

Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup

Warming roasted red pepper, tomato and basil soup
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes

Ingredients

  • 6 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 large onions roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 15 medium vine ripened tomatoes quartered and seeds removed
  • 3 large red peppers capsicum, de-seeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried marjoram
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Natural yogurt/Creme Fraiche to serve optional

Instructions

  • Pre-heat oven to 200 degrees C. Fill kettle and boil.
  • Place the chopped tomatoes and peppers onto two separate trays, drizzle each tray with 2 tablespoon olive oil and season well. Place in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until edges start to blacken.
  • Whilst the tomatoes and peppers are in the oven; heat up 2 tablespoon oil in a large pan, add the onions and fry slowly until soft. Add the garlic, dried herbs and stir. Once cooked, add the tomatoes and peppers to the onions along with all the cooking juices. Mix together well and add around 250ml of hot water from the kettle. Bring to the boil and then remove from the heat.
  • Transfer the vegetables and all juices to a blender or use an electric hand blender to create a smooth soup. Add more water if the soup appears to thick (should coat the back of a spoon. Tear up the basil leave, add to the soup and briefly blend again.  
  • Finally, pass the soup through a sieve to achieve a lovely smooth finish - use the back of a spoon to ensure all the soup is pushed through the sieve. - Get as much through as possible so to not take away any flavour. Reheat slightly if necessary (but don't boil). Season if required and serve.
  • Soup can be stored in the fridge for 5-7 days or if you want to keep it for longer; transfer to a container and freeze. 

The post Roasted Red Pepper, Tomato and Basil Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/roasted_red_pepper_tomato_soup/feed/ 1
Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/#comments Thu, 28 Jul 2016 20:45:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2029 Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed...

Read More

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.

Butternut Squash soup

Roasted Butternut squash soup

Reasons to put this recipe to the top of your 'mid-week tea' list or even your 'recipes to make for the freezer' list, right now:

  • It’s chocker with lots of healthy vegetables.
  • It fills you up in next to no time.
  • And it looks amazing with all those vibrant greens shining through from the celery and sage. What’s not to love about this soup?

Butternut squash can also be used to pad out a creamy pumpkin pasta dish and is also great in a quinoa salad side dish, which I usually serve with my satay chicken recipe.

Do you peel butternut squash before cooking?

Theres no need to peel butternut squash before cooking. Not only is this incredibly difficult but it also takes a good while to peel when raw. Its definitely so much easier to peel the skin off a roasted butternut squash. My favourite thing about preparing this squash soup is the roasting of the butternut.

How do you roast butternut squash?

  1. Chop the butternut squash in half length ways
  2. Scoop out the seeds with a spoon.
  3. Seeds can be discarded or washed, dried and then turned into a lovely snack by roasting in the oven until crisp.
  4. Drizzle oil over the exposed flesh of the butternut squash. Place on a baking tray and pop in the oven for around an hour.
  5. The squash is cooked when the tip of a knife easily pushes into the flesh.
  6. Remove from the oven a cool before peeling off the skin.

Roasted Butternut squash

So delicious! Baking the squash without peeling it means that the skin comes away from the flesh with no hassle, so this really is an easy dish.

Can you eat the skin of butternut squash?

The skin of butternut squash can be quite tough and so generally its best to remove. However, the skin can be edible if you roast the squash until the skin starts to soften.

How do you make roasted butternut squash soup?

  1. First roast the squash as instructed above
  2. Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised.
  3. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  4. Chop the roasted squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  5. Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.

Recipe Tip: Transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.

How long will this recipe keep?

Once made store this soup in a sealed container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days

Can I freeze homemade squash soup?

Yes homemade butternut squash can be frozen. Make sure the soup is cooled before transferring to a sealable container, then store in the freezer for up to 3 months. Defrost thoroughly before reheating. Make sure reheated soup is piping hot all the way through.

serve the soup with feta and pistachios

How do you add cream to soup without it curdling?

To prevent curdling always take soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding cream. Adding cream or yogurt to a soup can really add to the flavour as well as help to thicken soup with a thinner consistency.

What should I serve with this recipe?

Every good soup deserves warm homemade mini bread rolls, perfect for dunking and moping up. If you're having this soup as a starter to a 3 course dinner then why not follow with a roast beef dinner or comforting fish pie. For more 3 course meal ideas have a look at my collection of romantic dinner recipes. Love soup? Have a look at all my soup recipes here.

 1 hour 15 minutes to make recipegluten free recipeunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

butternut squash soup
Print

Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage

Roasted butternut squash soup with celery and sage. This healthy soup recipe is one of my favourite ways to use up all those late summer veggies. The aromatic sage and earthy celery create an amazing green Goddess-style colour and also go incredibly well with the sweet, roasted butternut squash. A topping of feta and crushed pistachios and we have ourselves one incredible soup.
Course aperitivo, Appetizer, lunch, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 401.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large butternut squash (1600g - raw whole weight)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 large onions chopped (200g)
  • 2 cloves garlic finely chopped
  • 2 sticks of celery chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • Black pepper
  • 750 ml vegetable stock
  • Fresh sage leaves (5 leaves, stalks removed and roughly chopped)
  • Water to add if required
  • Salt and pepper to season
  • Pistachios and feta to top (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 180°C. Halve the butternut squash - you'll need a large knife for this and a little bit of patience. Scoop out the seeds, and either discard or roast in the oven and serve as a snack. Keep the skin on - we will remove this after cooking!
  • Place the halved squash on a baking tray and drizzle with olive oil. Use your fingers to spread the oil evenly over the flesh. Place the squash in the oven and bake for around 1 hour. Check regularly, the squash will be cooked when it starts to caramelise and the tip of a knife can be pressed easily in to the flesh. Once cooked remove from the oven and set to one side to cool.
    Roasted Butternut squash
  • Whilst the butternut squash is cooking the rest of the soup can be prepared. Heat up 1 tablespoon of oil in a large pan or casserole dish. Add chopped onion and garlic and fry gently for 5 minutes or until slightly caramelised. Next add the chopped celery, 1 teaspoon oregano and black pepper. Stir well before pouring in 750ml of vegetable stock. Bring to the boil and then simmer gently for 20 minutes.
  • Whilst the soup is simmering, remove the skin from the cooling squash. This can be done by either peeling the skin away or by scooping out the flesh with a spoon. Once the skin is completely removed chop the squash into chunks and add to the soup. Mix in well and then add the freshly chopped sage.
  • Next transfer the soup to a blender and blitz until smooth. This is best done in batches to avoid over filling the blender.
  • Recipe Tip: transfer the bulky veg to the blender first with only a little of the stock liquid. Gradually add more stock whilst blending until the desired consistency is achieved. If all the stock is used and the soup is still too thick; extra tap water can be added. A good consistency is when the soup just coats the back of a spoon.
  • Finally pass the blended soup through a sieve, taste and add salt and pepper if required. If serving immediately reheat gently in a pan but do not boil. Serve in bowls and top with chopped pistachios and crumbled feta cheese if desired.
  • If storing for another day do not reheat. Transfer to sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Serving: 706g | Calories: 401.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.7g | Protein: 17.2g | Fat: 20.3g | Saturated Fat: 5.7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.8g | Sodium: 680mg | Fiber: 3.8g | Sugar: 23g

PIN FOR LATERButternut squash soup with celery and sage and topped with feta and chopped pistachios

The post Butternut Squash Soup with Celery and Sage appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 2
Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Oct 2016 12:48:50 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2643 With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had...

Read More

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
With the nights drawing in and with the noticeable drop in air temperature, I feel the need to get out my big pan and cook up some freezable batches of soup. This garden soup is a brand new recipe and one that came about due to the tonnes and tonnes of celery leaves we've had in our veg patch this year.

celery and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Why make this recipe?

Its rustic, its hearty and its a really properly homemade soup. The fresh taste from the celery leaves is nicely balanced here with the sweet apples and the bitter blue cheese. It really is a soup that has it all and is just what I want to come home to on a dark, rainy night.

Celery

Not something at the top of most people shopping lists and I know a lot of people would rather avoid celery. However, the humble celery stick is highly regarded in our household....more so since the creation of this great soup (and maybe a little more so by me than Ben, I could eat celery all day long).

Why is celery good for you?

  • Its super low in calories and fat (guilt free eating all the way)
  • It contains a good amount of fibre so is great for digestion.
  • Its shape, texture and strength make it perfect for chopping into crudites for dips. (check out my beetroot and red pepper dip for something sweet and zinging to dip your celery into).
  • Its ridiculously easy to grow. It really does take care of itself; as long as it has good soil and the room to grow to its full potential (a good 30cm between plants). The yield is also pretty good, especially in terms of leaves.
  • It can be used in all types of recipes and really gives a great boost to the flavour: salads, stews, soups, pesto. (watch out for my celery pesto post coming soon)
  • Its leaves, which are often over looked, usually have the most flavour and have a lovely deep green colour. As each plant supplies a large quantity of leaves; its more than likely that celery growers will find themselves over run. As the leaves are so bulky it can be extremely difficult to store them, so celery leaf soups, stews and pestos are the perfect solution. They look so pretty as well with the vibrant bright green shining through.

Ingredients

To make this celery, apple and blue cheese soup you will need:

  • Olive oil
  • Onions
  • Garlic cloves
  • Green apples
  • Celery stalks
  • Fresh sage leaves
  • Dried oregano
  • Celery leaves (optional)
  • Vegetable stock
  • Blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste
Celery leaves | ProperFoodie
onions | ProperFoodie
apples | ProperFoodie
celery apple and blue cheese soup | ProperFoodie

Growing celery

  • Celery needs its space to grow fully and its surprising how much it will spread. So leave plenty of room between plants.
  • Celery is ready to harvest when the sticks are around 20cm or more in length.
  • Healthy celery has upright stems which snap. Stems should not be limp and bendy.
  • Leaves should be fresh, crisp and a darker green to the rest of the plant
  • When harvesting try to keep the stem connected at the base and store as a whole plant. This helps to keep its freshness. Celery can be kept in the fridge for several weeks.
  • The leaves are less easy to store as they are quite bulky and there can be a lot just on one plant. They are also at their freshest and tastiest just after being removed from the stems. Therefore, remove and use as soon as you can. If you can't use all the leaves place washed leftovers in a bowl, cover with cling film and keep in the fridge for up to a week.
  • If using the stalks in a recipe, use a peeler and scrape away the outer layer, which will remove the stringy bits which can be quite annoying if they get stuck in your teeth.
  • If you're making this soup in a big batch for freezing, leave the blue cheese out and add later. Defrost, reheat and then melt in the cheese before serving. The fresh cheese really adds to the taste of the soup and helps bring it back to life. It also means you'll have some cheese leftover for a pretty topping.
  • Not a fan of blue cheese? Then leave it out. Its still a very tasty dish with plenty of flavour. Or you could always replace with a different cheese - I imagine a cream cheese would work really well.

Other autumnal recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

celery, apple and blue cheese garden soup | ProperFoodie
Print

Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Garden Soup

A hearty celery soup with sweet apples and blue cheese. Perfect for a cold, autumnal night.
Course Appetizer, starter, starter or main
Cuisine British
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 223kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 Onions peeled and chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 300 g of sweet green eating apples core removed and roughly chopped
  • 450 g celery stalks peeled to remove the stringy bits and chopped
  • 10 fresh sage leaves
  • 5 g oregano leaves or half teaspoon dried oregano
  • 250 g celery leaves washed and roughly chopped
  • 700 ml vegetable stock
  • 100 g blue cheese plus extra for topping
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • In a large stock pan heat the olive oil, add the garlic and onions, then gently cook for 2-3 minutes.
  • Next add the apples, celery stalks, sage and oregano. Stir well before pouring in the stock.
  • Bring to a simmer and then add the celery leaves. Mix well to help the leave to wilt.
  • Pop on the lid and leave to simmer gently for 20 minutes, check occasionally.
  • Once the celery and apple have softened remove from the heat and ladle the soup into a blender. Blend on high for 5 minutes to ensure the soup in nice a smooth, then return to the pan. To create a perfectly smooth consistency; sieve the soup back into the pan (make sure you push as much through the sieve as possible, otherwise some flavour may be lost).
  • (if freezing your soup, stop at this point and ladle into seal-able containers - add blue cheese and seasoning when ready to defrost and reheat)
  • Put the blended, sieved soup back on a low heat and melt in the blue cheese. Taste and add more cheese if desired and season.

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 223kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 1241mg | Potassium: 702mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 1412IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 243mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Celery, Apple and Blue Cheese Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/celery-apple-blue-cheese-soup/feed/ 4
Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/ https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/#comments Sun, 10 Apr 2022 16:47:03 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2815 Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley. Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam....

Read More

The post Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam. Delicious either way.

Chilli garlic prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Please note that this post contains affiliate links, which means if you click the link and then go on to purchase, I will receive a percentage of the cost. See my privacy policy and disclosure statement for further details.

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

This chilli garlic prawns starter is a great recipe thats easy to prepare and perfect for a make ahead appetiser.

The bright pink of the cooked king prawns stands out against the crunchy green of the courgettes and makes for a really impressive prawns starter, especially if you have friends for dinner. 

Its also a great option for a quick and easy, make ahead, Christmas Day starter.

🥘 Ingredients

This recipe makes approximately 15 chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks:

Ingredients for making chilli garlic prawns starter.

Ingredient notes

Measurements: For the amounts required, see the recipe card below and also use the toggle button to see the recipe in cups.

King prawns: King prawns are the best option here as they are large enough to serve on cocktail sticks. This recipe includes instructions for pan frying raw king prawns but if preferred you can use pre cooked prawns.

Mirin: If you can't get hold of any Mirin (sweet Japanese rice wine) you can substitute with 1 teaspoon of caster sugar mixed with 1 tablespoon of either white wine, white wine vinegar or dry sherry

Chilli: Optional.

Parsley: Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped dill or coriander.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Slice the courgette into ribbons using a peeler.
  2. Place the prepared courgette strips in a bowl and drizzle over 2 of the tablespoons of olive oil. Toss well to fully coat. Place a griddle pan on a high heat and set up a large plate with a piece of kitchen towel on, ready for the cooked courgette strips.
  3. Lay the courgette strips side by side in the hot pan and cook off in batches. Note that courgette strips are thin enough to just pan fry on one side.
  4. Leave the courgettes in the pan until griddle marks appear, then remove and place on the plate lined with kitchen towel. Layer more kitchen towel on top of cooked courgettes as the plate fills up.Four images showing how to make chilli garlic prawns starter for steps 1-4.
  5. Pour the remaining tablespoon of olive oil into a small jug or bowl. Add 2 tablespoons of honey, minced garlic clove, chopped chilli, 1 tablespoon mirin rice wine and the chopped parsley.
  6. Mix together well.
  7. Place the griddle pan on a high heat. When the pan is hot add the raw king prawns and pour over the chilli garlic glaze. Pan fry until the prawns turn bright pink.
  8. Transfer the cooked chilli garlic prawns to a bowl along with the glaze. If you think your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't yet thick or sticky, then remove the prawns and place in a low oven and bring the sauce to a simmer and heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.Four images showing how to make chilli garlic prawns starter for steps 5-8.
  9. Make the prawn cocktail sticks by skewering 2 cooked prawns on the stick with 2 folded strips of courgette sandwiched in between (see recipe images).
  10. At this point you can either chill the chilli garlic prawn cocktail sticks and serve cold. Or serve warm and straight away. To ensure a piping hot starter, place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving.
  11. Serve with a drizzle of oil, a sprinkle of fresh parley and a grind of black pepper.

💭 Expert tips

Courgette prep: peel along the length until you reach the seeds. Then turn the courgette and repeat until all sides have been peeled.

Pan fry in batches: both the courgette and the prawns can be pan fried in batches if it won't all fit in the pan at the same time. After cooking, both can be chilled in the fridge or kept warm in a low oven.

Cooking prawns: The best way to cook the prawns for this recipe is to pan fry them in the chilli glaze.

However, if you just want to cook the prawns without a glaze you can simply stir fry with oil or gently poached in simmering water. You will know the prawns are cooked when they turn bright pink all over.

Serving: Serve the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks as suggested or serve piled on top of the courgette on a large platter.

Alternatively, arrange in cocktail glasses or on larger skewers.

Getting a sticky finish on your prawns starter: You may find that your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't thick or sticky enough.

If this is the case, rather than over cook the prawns, remove them from the pan and place in a low oven to keep warm.

Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer and continue to heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can you make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, make and arrange the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks. Then transfer to your serving plate and cover in cling film then chill until ready to serve.

To make ahead but still serve hot the cooked ingredients should be chilled loose and not on cocktail sticks.

When ready to serve follow the reheating instructions below before arranging on sticks. (To ensure a piping hot starter place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving).

Can you reheat cooked prawns?

If you are wanting to reheat the cooked prawns make sure they are fully cooled and then refrigerate.

When ready to reheat; place the chilli garlic prawns on a baking tray and cook in the oven on high for 5 minutes or until sizzling and piping hot (the same method can be used to reheat the courgette).

Alternatively, return to the pan and stir fry in a little oil until piping hot. Use your cooked and chilled prawns within 24 hours. If you have bought pre-cooked prawns, follow the packet instructions for heating.

Honey, chilli and garlic king prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried courgette.

Prawn starters

An alternative prawns starter ideas include this simple Chinese prawns recipe, which could also be served up on cocktail sticks with a garnish of chopped spring onions. 

If a hot prawns starter isn't your thing, try preparing this recipe then chilling? Alternatively, have a look at Cucumber canapés with prawns, or make your own sushi rolls with prawns.

🍤 Other Prawn or Fish recipes

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

Chilli garlic prawns skewered on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette.
Print

Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter

Chilli garlic prawns starter served on cocktail sticks with pan fried strips of courgette. The king prawns are cooked in a spicy honey glaze and served with a sprinkle of chopped parsley. Make ahead and serve cold straight from the fridge. Or cook up in 30 minutes and serve warm with side of chilli jam. Delicious either way.
Course apperitif, Appetizer, starter
Cuisine British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 15 cocktail sticks
Calories 55kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large courgettes
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil (For the courgettes)
  • 300 g fresh raw king prawns
  • 1 tablespoon Oil (for chilli garlic glaze)
  • 2 tablespoon honey
  • 1 garlic clove minced, grated or finely chopped
  • 1 red chilli seeds removed and chilli finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon Mirin sweet Japanese rice wine
  • 20 g parsley roughly chopped
  • Extra oil, parsley and black pepper for serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Slice the courgette into ribbons using a peeler.
    2 large courgettes
  • Place the prepared courgette strips in a bowl and drizzle over 2 of the tablespoons of olive oil. Toss well to fully coat. Place a griddle pan on a high heat and set up a large plate with a piece of kitchen towel on, ready for the cooked courgette strips.
    2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Lay the courgette strips side by side in the hot pan and cook off in batches. Note that courgette strips are thin enough to just pan fry on one side.
  • Leave the courgettes in the pan until griddle marks appear, then remove and place on the plate lined with kitchen towel. Layer more kitchen towel on top of cooked courgettes as the plate fills up.
  • Pour the remaining tablespoon of olive oil into a small jar or bowl. Add the honey, garlic, chilli, mirin rice wine and the chopped parsley.
    1 tablespoon Oil, 2 tablespoon honey, 1 garlic clove, 1 red chilli, 1 tablespoon Mirin, 20 g parsley
  • Mix together well
  • Place the griddle pan on a high heat. When the pan is hot add the raw king prawns and pour over the chilli garlic glaze. Pan fry until the prawns turn bright pink.
    300 g fresh raw king prawns
  • Transfer the cooked prawns to a bowl along with the glaze. If you think your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't yet thick or sticky, then remove the prawns and place in a low oven and bring the sauce to a simmer and heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.
  • Make the prawn cocktail sticks by skewering 2 cooked prawns on the stick with 2 folded strips of courgette sandwiched in between (see recipe images).
  • At this point you can either chill the chilli garlic prawn cocktail sticks and serve cold. Or serve warm and straight away. To ensure a piping hot starter, place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving.
  • Serve with a drizzle of oil, a sprinkle of fresh parley and a grind of black pepper.
    Extra oil, parsley and black pepper for serving

Notes

Courgette prep: peel along the length until you reach the seeds. Then turn the courgette and repeat until all sides have been peeled.
King prawns: King prawns are the best option here as they are large enough to serve on cocktail sticks. This recipe includes instructions for pan frying raw king prawns but if preferred you can use pre cooked prawns.
Cooking prawns: The best way to cook the prawns for this recipe is to pan fry them in the chilli glaze. However, if you just want to cook the prawns without a glaze you can simply stir fry with oil or gently poached in simmering water. You will know the prawns are cooked when they turn bright pink all over.
Pan fry in batches: both the courgette and the prawns can be pan fried in batches if it won't all fit in the pan at the same time. After cooking, both can be chilled in the fridge or kept warm in a low oven.
Mirin: If you can't get hold of any Mirin (sweet Japanese rice wine) you can substitute with 1 teaspoon of caster sugar mixed with 1 tablespoon of either white wine, white wine vinegar or dry sherry
Chilli: Optional.
Parsley: Also optional and could be replaced with freshly chopped dill or coriander.
Getting a sticky finish on your prawns starter: You may find that your prawns are cooked but the sauce isn't thick or sticky enough. If this is the case, rather than over cook the prawns, remove them from the pan and place in a low oven to keep warm. Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer and continue to heat until its the right consistency. Drizzle the sauce over the prawns before it cools and sets.
Serving: Serve the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks as suggested or serve piled on top of the courgette on a large platter. Alternatively, arrange in cocktail glasses or on larger skewers.
Can you make this recipe ahead of time? Yes, make and arrange the chilli garlic prawns on cocktail sticks. Then transfer to your serving plate and cover in cling film then chill until ready to serve. 

To make ahead but still serve hot the cooked ingredients should be chilled loose and not on cocktail sticks. Then when ready to serve follow the reheating instructions below before arranging on sticks. (To ensure a piping hot starter place the finished 'prawns on sticks' on a baking tray and blast in the oven on high for a minute or so just before serving).
Can you reheat cooked prawns? If you are wanting to reheat the cooked prawns make sure they are fully cooled and then refrigerate. When ready to reheat; place the chilli garlic prawns on a baking tray and cook in the oven on high for 5 minutes or until sizzling and piping hot (the same method can be used to reheat the courgette). 

Alternatively, return to the pan and stir fry in a little oil until piping hot. Use your cooked and chilled prawns within 24 hours. If you have bought pre-cooked prawns, follow the packet instructions for heating.

Nutrition

Serving: 182g | Calories: 55kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 125mg | Potassium: 103mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in Nov 2016. Updated in Apr 2022 with an improved recipe, new images, step by step instructions and expert tips.

The post Chilli Garlic Prawns Starter appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-griddled-prawns/feed/ 8
Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/ https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/#comments Wed, 11 Jan 2017 22:36:59 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=3169 Mulligatawny chicken soup, with its slight tingle of spice and its lingering sweet aniseed flavour, is a delight to come home to on a cold Winters night. PJs on, curtains drawn, heating on full blast and a pan of mulligatawny goodness on the stove - all that's left to do is savour every drop and...

Read More

The post Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Mulligatawny chicken soup, with its slight tingle of spice and its lingering sweet aniseed flavour, is a delight to come home to on a cold Winters night. PJs on, curtains drawn, heating on full blast and a pan of mulligatawny goodness on the stove - all that's left to do is savour every drop and then hibernate until spring.mulligatawny

When Christmas is over, the decorations are away and all the pretty colourful lights have been taken down. Winter is truly upon us and there’s nothing on the horizon to cheer us up. On top of all this doom and gloom there always seems to be an abundance of chocolate and sugary snacks knocking about, not that this is all bad news, we all need a bit of chocolate in our lives! But for me, the aftermath of Christmas seems to create a hungry, chocolate-eating monster, which is never satisfied and forever aggravated by the constant supply of leftover Christmas treats.  And yet we’re all supposedly on “New Year, New Me” diets. Its probably the worst time to go on a diet, when all I ever want in January is a huge pile of mash with lashings of onion gravy followed by 3 Terry's chocolate oranges and a couple of mint matchmakers, hmmmmm.

mulligatawny

But, people, let’s not despair, instead let’s get out a humongous bowl of chicken and wild rice mulligatawny soup and laugh in the face of coldness and darkness. Rejoice in the bright colours and nutritious goodness of the chicken, wild rice, carrots, tarragon, and curry powder. Spring will be here before we know it!! …..and so will August and our wedding!! So I best put those chocolates to the back of the cupboard and then get thinking about my waistline and the dress I hope to look ‘oh so graceful and fairy like’ in. So once the choccies are out of sight and out of mind, full attention can be given to the healthy stuff and the best way to make it tasty and comforting.

Mulligatawny

How to make Mulligatawny soup

The recipe for this bowl of mulligatawny soup, is really simple and includes plenty of veggies and protein to get anyone back on the right track. Best of all its one of those recipes that can hoover up all the leftover bits and bobs, including leftover turkey if you want to swap that in for the chicken. You can even include veggies that are on the cusp of, or just over, their best before dates. As this is a soup and everything is thrown in the pot and simmered down, veggies can be limp and lifeless when they go in the pan and with a bit of love and a good mix with some curry powder, they can be revitalised into what is now my favourite winter meal.

mulligatawny

Ingredients for mulligatawny soup

My personal must-have  ingredients for this dish are green, Golden Delicious apples, which melt into a sweet, mushy sauce; and carrots cut into thin, stubby batons, which soften-up during cooking and pair amazingly well with the sweet apple and aniseed flavoured tarragon. However, if you don’t have apples and tarragon you can swap for dried fruits (currants, apricots) and fresh coriander, which tastes just as good.  The main staples for my version of this great Indian classic are shredded Chicken and a mixture of long grain and wild rice. However, any variations can be used for this: leftover turkey or pork meat, chunks of white fish such as cod or haddock, white rice, wholegrain rice, small pastas (orzo, macaroni) or even diced potatoes and sweet potatoes. Open your fridge and cupboards and find the best veggies and carbs that will make your kind of mulligatawny!

For an extra treat, serve up this soup with my easy homemade bread rolls.

📖 Recipe

Mulligatawny
Print

Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup

A warming chicken and wild rice mulligatawny soup perfect for a cold winters night and great for using up leftover meat and veggies
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Calories 292kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 Onions finely chopped
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped
  • 1 large carrot peeled and chopped into small batons
  • 1 green apple cubed
  • 150 g of long grain and wild rice
  • Splash of white wine
  • 700 ml Chicken stock
  • 2 tablespoon Curry powder
  • 1 teaspoon Ground coriander
  • 2 teaspoon Black onion seeds
  • 1 tablespoon brown muscovado sugar
  • 200 g Chicken or turkey meat shredded
  • 1 tablespoon Plain flour
  • Handful of fresh tarragon leaves
  • Seasoning
  • Harissa paste or fresh chilli for extra flavour and heat if desired

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in large pan. Gently fry the onions and garlic until soft. Add the uncooked rice to the pan and stir well ensuring each grain is coated in oil. Keeping the pan on a medium heat and add the splash of wine and half the stock. Then add the carrot, apple, curry powder, ground coriander, onion seeds and sugar. Bring to the boil and then simmer.
  • Top up with the remaining stock as required. Once all the stock has been added mix in the chicken or turkey and continue to simmer and reduce. After the 30 minutes check the consistency. If the soup is thinner than you would like make a paste using the tablespoon of plain flour and a little cold water. Add the paste to the soup and stir continuously until it thickens. Add more flour paste if required. If your soup is too thick add water until you are happy with the consistency. Always check the taste and add more spices if the taste has been watered down.
  • Taste the soup and season if desired. At this point the soup can be transferred to seal-able containers, left to cool and then frozen. If serving immediately, divide into bowls and top with fresh tarragon. If desired a tablespoon of harissa paste or fresh chopped chillies can be stirred in just before serving to give extra flavour or heat.

Nutrition

Serving: 410g | Calories: 292kcal | Fat: 7.4g

Nutritional Info

**Estimated nutritional information per serving of chicken mulligatawny and per 100g of Chicken mulligatawny. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

Mulligatawny Chicken & Wild rice soup

The post Mulligatawny Chicken and Wild Rice Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/mulligatawny-chicken-wild-rice/feed/ 4
Simple Guacamole Recipe https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/ https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/#respond Thu, 22 Feb 2018 14:02:15 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=9285 A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh Simple guacamole recipe Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made...

Read More

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh

Mexican dip

Simple guacamole recipe

Homemade guacamole is a really easy and tasty dip made with avocado, chillies and lime juice. Perfect for nibbles at get togethers and partys along with other tasty dips such as beetroot hummus, celery, apple and walnut pesto or roasted red pepper dip.  It takes just 5 minute to make this guacamole recipe and its so much better than a shop bought version. Surprisingly, shop bought guacamole tends to include cream, but as avocado has quite a creamy texture already I find its not necessary to add any cream. So lets get to making a homemade, healthy guacamole recipe. For a proper Mexican guacamole recipe I always add chopped chilli, cubed tomato, lime juice and fresh coriander.

mexican guacamole recipe

What is guacamole made of?

  • Avocado flesh
  • Lime juice
  • Fresh red chilli
  • Cubed and deseeded tomatoes
  • freshly chopped coriander
  • Pinch of salt to taste

The main ingredient in a simple guacamole recipe is of course avocado, which is what gives guacamole its recognisable light green colour and creamy texture. The other usual ingredients in a guacamole are tomatoes, lime juice, salt and coriander. Fresh chilli can also be added for a spicy guacamole recipe. A little bit of chopping is required and of course the avocado needs to be cut, de-stoned and the skin removed. For this simple guacamole recipe I tend to mash the avocado flesh with a fork whilst its still in its skin. This just needs the avocado to be cut in half and the stone removed, then mash each half. This is so simple to do and means much less mess.

Guacamole recipe

Can you eat guacamole by itself?

Guacamole is usually used as a dip or topping and not usually eaten on its own. However, whole avocado can often be eaten by itself or in a salad.

How do you make guacamole? (Step-by-Step Guide)

  1. Start by cutting the avocado in half. Move the knife around the stone and then twist the two halves apart with your handshow to cut avocado cut and twist
  2. To remove the avocado stone carefully hit the stone with the blade of the knife then twist and pull out.how to cut avocado
  3. With the skin still on, use a fork to mash up the avocado flesh. The avocado skin acts as a sort of bowl. Then scoop the mashed flesh out and into a bowl.how to slice avocado
  4. Immediately squeeze lime juice over the flesh to prevent it from going brown.how to keep cut avocado fresh
  5. Next add the chopped chilli, cubed tomatoes and most of the chopped coriander to the avocado and mix well. Transfer to a serving bowl and top with the remaining coriander or fresh parsley if you prefer.guacamole recipe

Serving suggestion: serve with crisps and dips, chicken tacos, fajita chicken salad or on top of a smokey chilli con carne.

Can you make guacamole in advance?

Yes guacamole can be made in advance; up to a maximum of 2 days before you will need it. The tricky part is making sure the dip doesn't go brown. I have found the best way to keep guacamole fresh and green is to add the juice of 1 lime for every avocado used. Mix the juice directly into the dip and then place the dip in the fridge in a sealed container or dish wrapped well with cling film. A few more tips and tricks with avocados can be found here.

Do avocado pits keep guacamole from going brown?

No the avocado pit or stone has no use in stopping guacamole from going brown. - so don't be tempted to pop a stone in the middle of your dip - it really won't do anything. In my experience the lime juice and a sealed container method is the best.

Is guacamole vegan?

Yes, when made with just avocado, tomato and chilli, guacamole is suitable for vegans. This simple guacamole recipe and homemade recipes in general are all vegan. However, watch out for shop bought varieties which tend to have cream added to guacamole!!!

Is guacamole dip fattening?

If consumed in huge quantities, yes guacamole is fattening. The fat in guacamole is from the avocado, which is mainly good fats. So half an avocado everyday is a great way to maintain a healthy balanced diet and get in some of those healthy fatty acids. However, the calories and fat are high in avocados so over doing the guacamole isn't advised.

Avocado recipes

For more ideas on how to use avocados have a look at my easy avocado recipes post. Or why not make some paprika chicken wraps, which are great with guacamole added. If you fancy a guacamole dip with a twist why not try pumpkin guacamole?

Under 300 calories1 of 5 a dayLow Carb RecipeVegetarian Recipe

📖 Recipe

guacamole recipe
Print

Simple Guacamole Recipe

A simple and authentic guacamole recipe with creamy avocado, perfect for spreading on your tacos or for dunking in tortillas. Easy to put together in just 5 minutes and a squeeze of lime helps keeps this lovely Mexican dip nice and fresh
Course dip, party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 people
Calories 118.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large avocado (120g flesh)
  • 1 Juice of a lime
  • ½ fresh red chilli (7g finely chopped)
  • 2 baby tomatoes (35g diced small)
  • Handful of fresh coriander (roughly chopped)

Instructions

  • Half the avocado by slicing the knife into the fruit and move around the stone. Then twist each half in opposite directions and pull apart. 
    how to cut avocado cut and twist
  • To remove the stone carefully hit the blade of the knife into the stone, then twist and pull. 
    how to cut avocado
  • Leave the avocado flesh in the skin and use a fork to carefully mash the flesh and then scoop out. 
    how to slice avocado
  • Add the lime juice to the avocado and mix well. (Lime helps to prevent browning). Then add the chopped chilli, diced tomato and most of the coriander. Mix together well then transfer to a serving bowl and sprinkle over any remaining parsley.
    guacamole recipe

Nutrition

Serving: 81g | Calories: 118.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.9g | Protein: 1.4g | Fat: 11.8g | Saturated Fat: 2.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.3g | Sugar: 1.1g

The post Simple Guacamole Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/simple-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 0
Beetroot Hummus https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/ https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/#comments Sat, 07 Jul 2018 15:42:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=7013 AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever. Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but...

Read More

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
AD FEATURE FOR ENGLISH PROVENDER

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.

Baby beetroot hummus

Its been a good while since I've posted on here - mainly due to sunning myself in Sardinia (more about that soon), but also because we've been busy finishing off our pizza oven build - and ......its nearly ready!! So exciting - I can't wait to get cooking in our little outdoor oven (named Alberto by the way, after the owner of our B&B in Verona, where we got married last year 🙂

Baby beetroot hummus

Outdoor cooking

In preparation for some downright, awesome, alfresco cooking I have been stock piling recipes that are perfect for any kind of outdoor feast, including steak and veggie BBQ skewers, roasted stuffed peppers with cous cous in cheese sauce and some lovely homemade mint ice cream lollies. This sweet and earthy beetroot hummus is another one of these recipes and will go with anything - in fact I have a little idea bubbling away involving beetroot hummus on a pizza - I really think it will work and I'm definitely doing this before the end of Summer.

beetroot hummus with shredded beetroot

Hummus

Hummus? Houmous? Tesco Hummus? Waitrose Hummus? Whatever you call it or where you buy it, hummus is the dip that really knows how to please all tastes a preferences. There are so many flavours now-a-days that its hard to keep up. I do love a nice harrissa-flavoured, Moroccan style hummus, but I also love hummus with peas and mint. Or just plain hummus - its all great.

sweet pickled beetroot hummus

Beetroot hummus

This being said, beetroot hummus (especially with some creamy horseradish) is by far my most favourite kind of hummus. But I do feel that making it from scratch is the only way to really appreciate this colourful little dip. And heres my top tip for the bestest, most smoothest homemade hummus ever . . .

beetroot hummus

Shelled Chickpeas

. . .shell your chickpeas!! And this isn't really that hard at all. It might be a little time consuming, but oh so worth it. If you haven't shelled chickpeas before all you need to do is drain the tinned chickpeas into a sieve and rinse under tap water. Then take each chickpea and gently rub your fingertips over the surface and loosen the outer skin. The inner pea should then pop out of the skin. Discard the skin and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all your chickpeas are shelled. Easy.

These little chickpeas are the star of the show, so it really is worth the extra effort.

beetroot hummus with horseradish and creme fraiche dressing

The rest of the recipe is super easy - all the ingredient go into a blender and are blitz until smooth.

Happy dipping!

 15 minutes to make recipeunder 100 calories recipeVegetarian recipeGluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

Baby beetroot hummus
Print

Beetroot Hummus

Delightfully pink, creamy hummus made using baby beets and pickled beetroot, along with a super easy trick to ensure the softest and most smoothest homemade hummus ever.
Course party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine Moroccan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 People
Calories 59.6kcal

Ingredients

For the Beetroot Hummus

  • 400 g tin of Chickpeas 120g drained
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 Garlic clove finely chopped or ½ tablespoon Very Lazy Chopped Smoked Garlic
  • Pinch sea salt
  • .5 Juice of a lemon
  • 2 cooked baby beetroots
  • 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle I used English Provender beetroot pickle
  • 1 tablespoon tahini paste sesame seed paste

For the dressing

  • 1 tablespoon creme fraiche
  • 1 teaspoon horseradish sauce

Optional

  • Extra oil and black pepper for serving

Instructions

To make the Beetroot Hummus

  • Drain the chickpeas into a sieve and rinse well under the tap. Peel off the outer shell of the chickpeas by rubbing with your finger tips until the inner pea pops out. Discard the shell and place the chickpea in a bowl. Continue until all chickpeas are shelled.
  • Shelled chickpeas produces and smoother and more flavoursome hummus.
  • In a blender blitz together all the hummus ingredients until smooth: shelled chickpeas, oil, garlic, salt, lemon juice, 2 cooked baby beets, 2 tablespoon beetroot pickle, and 1 tablespoon tahini paste.
  • Transfer the hummus into a bowl and chill in the fridge.

For the horseradish dressing

  • In a small bowl mix together the creme fraiche and horseradish sauce - season if desired.

Serve

  • Spoon the horseradish dressing over the bowl of chilled hummus. Drizzle over oil and grind on some black pepper if desired, then serve.

Nutrition

Serving: 41g | Calories: 59.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 4.5g | Protein: 2.1g | Fat: 3.8g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 1.2g

PIN FOR LATER

beetroot hummus with horseradish creme fraiche dressing

The post Beetroot Hummus appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/beetroot-hummus/feed/ 4
Christmas soup: celeriac and potato https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/ https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/#comments Mon, 10 Dec 2018 22:38:10 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8187 Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton Christmas soup Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even...

Read More

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton

Celeriac soup

Christmas soup

Full of wintery veggies and topped with a toasted brie and cranberry crouton, this celeriac soup is perfect for Christmas. Be it a cosy Christmas Eve soup, a delectable starter on Christmas day, or even a freezer meal tucked away for those chilled out nights when no one wants to cook. The creamy potato and nutty celeriac are sure to bring smiles all round. If celeriac isn't your thing cauliflower soup is also a great option for Christmas.

Christmas soup - properfoodie

How to prepare celeriac

So the star of this Christmas recipe is of course Celeriac - the large bulbous root of the celery plant. Celeriac root is actually very easy to peel and chop up and once chopped it can be eaten raw or cooked, although in this case we are cooking it. To peel the celeriac use a large sharp knife and gently slice the skin off moving the knife around the edge of the root (see video below for a better visual of this). Next simply slice and dice the peeled celeriac, which can then be boiled or roasted - here we are simmering in our soup.

Celeriac and potato soup

Celeriac and potato soup

The base of this soup is chopped onion, diced potato and diced celeriac. Seasoned with bay and thyme and then blended until smooth. Its so quick and so easy to prepare and as we're all so terribly busy at Christmas, its also nice to know that this can be prepared in advanced and either refrigerated for up to 3 days or kept in the freezer for up to 3 months.
Celeriac and Potato Christmas Soup_Debra Jones

Cranberry and Brie Crouton

To make this soup extra festive I like to top mine with a brie and cranberry crouton, made simply by: slicing up a french stick, topping each round with a piece of brie and a blanched cranberry, and then grilling on high for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Personally I love a truffle brie and it goes amazingly well with this celeriac soup.

Other soups you might like:

For more soup ideas have a look at my soup recipes collection

📖 Recipe

Celeriac soup
Print

Celeriac and Potato Christmas soup

Festive homemade Celeriac and potato Christmas soup topped with hazelnuts, truffle oil and a cranberry and brie crouton
Course Appetizer, Christmas, starter, supper
Cuisine British, Christmas
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For the soup

  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 2 large onions 325g peeled and finely chopped
  • 1 large clove of garlic 5g finely chopped
  • 2 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 small celeriac 750g peeled and cubed
  • 2 small baking potatoes 300g peeled and cubed
  • 500 ml Vegetable stock
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 2 tablespoon Creme Fraiche

For the topping


  • 1 small French stick
  • Chopped blanched hazelnuts
  • Brie cut into slices truffle flavoured if desired
  • Handful of fresh cranberries
  • Extra fresh thyme
  • Few drizzles of olive oil or truffle oil.

Instructions

To make the Soup

  • Heat the oil in a large pan and fry the chopped onion and garlic until soft. While the onions are cooking peel and chop the celeriac and potatoes. Next add the bay leaves, sprigs of thyme, celeriac and potatoes. Pour over the stock and bring to the boil. Then place on a lid and simmer for 20 minutes.

To make the Brie and Cranberry Croutons

  • These are best prepared fresh - so if preparing soup in advance don’t make the croutons until you are ready for them. Place a handful of fresh cranberries into a small container or cup and cover with boiling water - set to one side for 2 minutes. Next slice 1 cm thick circles from a French stick. Each circle will be a crouton for the soup - prepare as many croutons as you need. Place the bread rounds on a baking tray and top each one with a slice of brie. Next carefully remove the cranberries from the hot water and push one or two cranberries into the cheese on each piece of bread. Heat the grill.

Finishing the soup and serving

  • After 20 minutes remove the lid from the soup pan. Find and remove the bay leaves and thyme. Use a hand or stand blender to blitz the soup until smooth. To make it extra smooth pass well blended soup through a sieve.
  • Finally, season and stir in the honey and creme fraiche.
  • To serve, reheat the soup and place the croutons under a high grill for 5 minutes or until the cheese is melted. Ladle out the soup, top with hazelnuts and truffle oil and place a grilled crouton on the top.
  • Or alternatively store the soup in sealable containers and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 347g | Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 27.6g | Protein: 7.6g | Fat: 8.1g | Saturated Fat: 2.7g | Sodium: 360mg | Sugar: 7.6g

The post Christmas soup: celeriac and potato appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/christmas-soup-celeriac-hazelnut/feed/ 1
Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/#comments Thu, 13 Dec 2018 18:23:55 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=8216 A delicious, spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by the sweetness of vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraishe. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats...

Read More

The post Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
A delicious, spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by the sweetness of vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraishe. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats not enough - its also great for using up leftover turkey or leftover chicken!!

split pea and spicy chicken soup

Spicy Chicken Soup with yellow and green split peas

If you're ever in need of a recipe that will feed a crowd but isn't the usual hot pot, chicken tikka masala curry or chilli con carne, then a spicy chicken soup, which is actually more of stew, will always do the job. This particular soup is also bulked up with split peas, which soak up all the spicy Indian flavours and also adds a wonderful texture to the soup.

Yellow split pea soup

What do you put in a homemade chicken soup?

Generally when it comes to chicken or turkey soup  - anything goes. Its great for using up leftovers and clearing out the fridge. So its especially good at Christmas when theres plenty of leftover turkey and veggies. So even though its not written in the recipe - if you have leftover carrots, leftover leeks, leftover potatoes - whatever - chuck em in!

In the recipe below I've actually stayed more true to a tarka dahl type curry - using onions, tomatoes and pulses as the base of the dish. But the beauty of this soup is that you can choose what goes in and what stays out. And that includes the spices. . . . Theres a great article here: for inspiration on different spices and how you can use them.

chicken and split pea soup recipe

How do you make spicy chicken soup?

If you are using leftover chicken or turkey then this goes in towards the end of the recipe. Same goes for raw chicken accept a little prep is required before hand, where the chicken is seared off in a pan first. The rest of the ingredients, apart from the split peas, all go into one big pan and are cooked down into a soup. The split peas are boiled in water in a separate pan for around 45 minutes to ensure they are nice and soft before being mixed into the soup.

yellow split pea and spicy chicken soup

How can I spice up a chicken soup?

If you have ever asked yourself this question then this recipe is your answer! Turmeric, garam masala, cumin seed, fresh coriander, fresh chilli, and garlic -  all provide an array of spice and flavour and really do boost a chicken soup in both colour and taste. Of course a very similar recipe to this, which will also give the same affect, is mulligatawny soup. - My recipe for this uses carrots, nigella(onion) seeds, and wild rice - love it!! If you're after a more mellow soup why not try tuscan ribollita soup, leek and potato soup or creamy cauliflower soup.

spicy chicken and split pea soup

This soup is made extra special with the toppings of creme fraiche, spring onion and fresh coriander - It just wouldn't be the same without these 🙂 Enjoy!!

OTHER SPICY RECIPES:

For more recipe ideas for a cosy night in have a look at my romantic dinner recipes post.

📖 Recipe

split pea and spicy chicken soup
Print

Spicy chicken soup

A delicious spicy chicken soup crammed full of Indian spices, off-set by sweet vine tomatoes and cooling creme fraiche. With the addition of both yellow and green spilt peas this filling soup not only satisfies the hungriest of crowds but also ticks the box for a healthy and nutritious meal. And if thats not enough - its also great for using up leftover turkey or leftover chicken!!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine British, Indian, leftovers
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 people
Calories 470kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g yellow split peas
  • 200 g green split peas
  • 800 g raw Chicken breast or 650g cooked leftover Chicken/Turkey
  • ½ tablespoon olive oil (to cook chicken if using raw)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil (for frying off the onions)
  • 500 g onion finely chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic finely chopped (7g)
  • 500 g vine tomatoes quartered and seeds scooped out and discarded.
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ½ teaspoon garam masala
  • ½ teaspoon medium curry powder
  • Salt and pepper
  • 2 green chillies finely chopped (25g)
  • 2 tablespoon tomato puree
  • 500 ml water

To serve:

  • Creme fraiche
  • Sliced spring onion
  • Fresh coriander

Instructions

  • Place the split peas into a medium sized pan, cover with double the amount of water, bring to the boil and simmer for 45 minutes with the lid on (or follow instructions on pack).
  • Whilst the split peas are cooking prepare the raw chicken (skip this step if using cooked chicken or turkey): Slice the chicken into 2 cm chunks. Heat up half a tablespoon olive oil in a large frying pan or wok and add the raw chicken. Seal the meat on all sides and fry for at least 5 minutes. Transfer the chicken to a bowl and set to one side.
  • Check the split peas - add more water if needed and keep at a simmer.
  • Next start to make the soup: In a large pan heat 1 tablespoon of oil. Add the chopped onion and garlic and cook gently until soft. Next add the quartered vine tomatoes (seeds removed), followed by the turmeric, cumin seeds, garam masala, curry powder, and seasoning. Stir well ensuring the spices fully coat the onions and tomatoes. Cook for a further 2 minutes to allow the tomatoes to soften.
  • Next add the chopped green chilli, tomato puree and 500ml tap water. Stir well.
  • Now mix in the chicken breast that was sealed off earlier. Or if using pre cooked / leftover turkey or chicken now is the time to slice or shred this and add to the soup. Mix well and bring everything to a simmer.
  • Finally return to the split peas - taste test to see if they are cooked through and soft. If so, drain and transfer to the soup. Mix well one last time.
  • If the soup appears a little thin, continue to simmer on a low heat until reduced down to the right consistency.
  • Serve up and top with creme fraiche, spring onions and fresh coriander. Or transfer and store in sealable containers. This soup will keep well in the fridge for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Serving: 460g | Calories: 470kcal | Carbohydrates: 49.7g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 3.4g | Potassium: 240mg | Sugar: 10.2g

The post Spicy Chicken Soup (/leftover turkey soup) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/spicy-chicken-soup/feed/ 2
Hungarian Mushroom Soup https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/#respond Sun, 19 May 2019 07:00:29 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10104 Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love! What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup? Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika. The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery...

Read More

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!

hungarian soup

What is in a Rustic Hungarian Mushroom Soup?

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rich, creamy mushroom recipe, which includes a good helping of Hungary’s most treasured spice: paprika.

The combination of chunky mushrooms and sweet, peppery paprika produces a robust, earthy and flavoursome soup that is just crying out for a dollop of sour cream!

What is in Creamy Hungarian mushroom soup?

This soup uses just a few common ingredients:

  • Butter
  • Onion 
  • Mushrooms (I use closed cup and shiitake mushrooms)
  • Plain flour
  • 2 ½ tsps. paprika (I use standard paprika, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it)
  • White wine
  • Good quality vegetable stock
  • Soy sauce
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Soured cream
  • Lemon juice
  • Dried or fresh dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley
  • Extra sour cream for topping

RECIPE TIP: Although the dish is titled Hungarian Mushroom Soup, it is not essential to use Hungarian paprika. Standard paprika will work fine. However, the use of authentic Hungarian paprika, which has a deep red colour and sweeter flavour, would undoubtedly produce a richer, sweeter soup.

Ingredients for hungarian mushroom soup

How to prepare Hungarian mushroom soup

  1. In a large pan, fry the onions in butter until soft, then add the mushrooms and cook for another 2 minutes.how to make hungarian soup
  2. When the mushrooms start to soften, sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.add flour and paprika to mushrooms
  3. Next, add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika stuck to the base of the pan. Then gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually, until the soup starts to boil and thicken.add soy sauce to the soup
  4. Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the sour cream, then stir in well. (IMPORTANT NOTEadding the sour cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle!)add sour cream
  5. Add the lemon juice, dill, and seasoning to taste.add lemon juice and dill
  6. Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra dollops of sour cream.season and serve with fresh parsley

Can you freeze this soup?

Yes, Hungarian mushroom soup can be frozen. Allow to fully cool before transferring to an airtight container. Freeze for up to 3 months and defrost thoroughly before reheating. Reheat in a pan and ensure the soup is piping hot throughout before serving.

STORING TIP: Freshly made soup will also keep in the fridge, in a sealed container, for 2 days.

mushroom soup

What to Serve with this recipe?

An indulgent dish like this definitely requires an indulgent pairing and something that you can dunk into all that creamy, mushroomy goodness!

Without a doubt, this soup pairs well with fully loaded sandwiches. Any kind of grilled cheese will work well, and in particular, a Mushroom grilled cheese sandwich would pair up amazingly. You could also try this soup with Paprika chicken wraps or a fully loaded Beef brisket burrito!

mushroom soup with paprika and soured cream

Grab yourself a massive bowl and get ready for a delicious creamy and simple soup recipe like you’ve never tasted before! Enjoy!

Other soups you might like:

📖 Recipe

hungarian mushroom soup
Print

Hungarian Mushroom Soup

Hungarian mushroom soup is a rustic, comforting dish using paprika, soy sauce, and sour cream for an earthy, simple mushroom soup recipe you’ll love!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine hungarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 214.5kcal

Ingredients

  • 30 g butter
  • 150 g Onion finely chopped
  • 500 g mushrooms I used closed cup and shiitake
  • 3 tablespoon plain flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoon paprika I used standard, but use Hungarian if you can get hold of it
  • 100 ml white wine
  • 300 ml good quality vegetable stock
  • 3 tablespoon light soy sauce
  • 200 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 3 tablespoon soured cream
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • 3 teaspoon dried dill
  • Salt and pepper
  • 20 g chopped parsley
  • Extra soured cream for topping

Instructions

  • In a large pan melt the butter and fry the onions until soft. Next add the mushrooms and stir fry for a further 2 minutes.
  • When the mushrooms start to soften sprinkle with flour and paprika and mix in well.
  • Next add the white wine and scrape up any bits of flour/paprika that are stuck to the base of the pan. Once the wine has reduced by half, gradually add the stock, milk and soy sauce and stir continually until the soup starts to boil and thicken.
  • Take the soup off the heat and allow to cool slightly before adding the soured cream then stir in well. (Note - adding the soured cream whilst still on the heat will cause it to curdle).
  • Finally, stir in the dill and lemon juice and season to taste.
  • Serve with freshly chopped parsley and extra blobs of soured cream.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 363g | Calories: 214.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.9g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 11.9g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.6g | Sodium: 880mg | Sugar: 9.9g

I first shared this Hungarian Mushroom Soup recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Hungarian Mushroom Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/hungarian-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/ https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/#respond Tue, 21 May 2019 23:22:43 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10217 FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's...

Read More

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
FEATURED AD FOR THE FISH SOCIETY. Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.

Clam chowder recipe

Please note that this post contains affiliate links to a product I am recommending on the Fish Society website, which means if you click a link and then go on to purchase a product, I will receive a small percentage – this will not affect the amount you pay. If you do click and buy – Thank you for helping in the continuation of this blog, it really means a lot!! I will only ever link to and promote products that I have tried and tested myself.

Clam Chowder Recipe

There are a handful of recipes that have stayed with me since travelling around the world in 2012. Clam chowder in a sourdough bread bowl from Fishermans Wharf in San Francisco is one of these.

Boudin Clam Chowder in sourdough bread bowl

Surely, the most luxurious soup there is. Its rich and creamy, and chocker full of potatoes and fresh clams. There are, of course, a couple of other stand out dishes from our travels; mainly, Thai green curry and Thai red curry, and of course not forgetting the incredible Amarone risotto we had for our wedding breakfast starter in Italy. But, none of these were served to us in a freshly baked sourdough bread bowl or made with clams that had been in the sea just a few hours earlier. So clearly, this dish is a winner in many respects.

Fishermans wharf San Fransisco

How many types of Clam chowder are there?

There are two types of clam chowder. The clam chowder we had in San Francisco is known as a New England clam chowder or Boston clam chowder. Typically the New England clam chowder is white, creamy and made with potatoes. The other type is the Manhattan clam chowder which, is red and made with tomatoes - a recipe for another time perhaps.

one pan clam chowder

What is clam chowder made of?

This clam chowder recipe is a mixture of onions, potatoes, bacon, white wine, milk, herbs and cream. The main ingredient is of course clams! I've used white whole-shell meretrix clams, very kindly provided by the lovely people over at The Fish Society.

Who are The Fish Society?

The fish society is an online fish monger, supplying the whole of the UK and beyond, into Europe and even the US. Fish lands in the UK fishing ports and is auctioned on day one and on day two its frozen by The Fish Society, ready to be shipped out to customers. Their products are frozen soon after being caught which, maintains the freshness of the fish and ensures that they can supply the widest possible variety.

Living in a small town, nowhere near to the sea, good quality and wide varieties of fish can be hard to come by. So I absolutely love the idea of a online fish monger delivering quality, frozen fish to my front door. Especially when it means I can get hold of a bag full of clams for under a tenner or even order a bit of lobster if it takes my fancy!!

Clam Chowder Ingredients

To make clam chowder you will need a few basic ingredients:

  • 1kg frozen whole shell clams
  • Chopped smoked bacon
  • Butter
  • Onion
  • Garlic clove
  • Potatoes
  • Flour
  • White wine
  • Semi skimmed milk
  • Bay leaves
  • Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Cream
  • Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

clam chowder and sourdough

How do you make homemade clam chowder?

  1. If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  2. Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.fry bacon until golden
  3. With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.add butter onions and potatoes
  4. Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.add white wine and gradually add milk
  5. Once all the milk has been added bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  6. If using fresh raw clams cook these now until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  7. If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  8. Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  9. Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream. IMPORTANT TIP: don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.take off heat and stir in the cream
  10. Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

What can I eat with clam chowder?

If you are going to eat anything with clam chowder I highly recommend the traditional sourdough. Either large pieces to dunk or if you're feeling adventurous, hollow out a loaf of sourdough and use this as your bowl. A wonderful tradition created by the Boudin bakery, which can be found at the start of Fisherman's Wharf, San Francisco.

Clam chowder in sourdough bowl at boudin

How do you store this recipe?

Once the clam chowder is fully cooled transfer to a sealable container and keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. To reheat transfer to a large pan and slowly heat on the stove. Stir continually and cook until the chowder is just about simmering to prevent the cream from curdling. If you've used fresh or canned clams you can freeze the chowder for up to 3 months. Thoroughly defrost before reheating as above. If using frozen clams you should only refrigerate the chowder - do not freeze.

Clam chowder with frozen clams

For more fishy inspiration check out The Fish Society website. Enjoy the chowder! - And if you haven't already, and you happen to be in the area, definitely check out clam chowder at Boudins Bakery in San Fran!

debbie and ben in san fransisco

Love creamy chowder? Why not try this creamy Hungarian mushroom soup or this Creamy mushroom pasta.

Other Fish Recipes

📖 Recipe

Print

Clam Chowder

Creamy clam chowder made with meretrix frozen clams, chunky potato and smokey bacon. Served with fresh parsley and pieces of soft sourdough bread for dipping. This delicious clam chowder soup recipe is my favourite way to enjoy clams and has been directly inspired by the clam chowder on Fisherman's Wharf.
Course Appetizer, fish, main meal, Soup, starter, starter or main
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 445.7kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 kg frozen whole shell clams alternatively use fresh or canned
  • 125 g Chopped smoked bacon
  • 50 g Butter
  • 160 g Onion
  • 1 Garlic clove
  • 300 g Potatoes peeled and cubed
  • 2 tablespoon Plain flour
  • 100 ml White wine
  • 200 ml Semi skimmed milk
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 3 Sprigs of fresh thyme
  • Water - add until happy with consistency
  • 100 ml Cream
  • 20 g Fresh parsley
  • Sourdough bread to serve

Instructions

  • If using pre cooked frozen meretrix clams from The Fish Society, remove these from the freezer at least 6 hours before preparing the dish and leave on the side to fully defrost. If using canned clams or fresh clams no preparation is required.
  • Pan fry 50g chopped smoked bacon until golden. Remove half of the bacon and set to one side for a topping later on.
    fry bacon until golden
  • With the remaining bacon still in the pan add 50g butter and melt. Then add 1 chopped onion and 1 clove of minced garlic. Pan fry on medium until soft then add 300g of cubed potatoes and continue to stir fry for another 5 minutes.
    add butter onions and potatoes
  • Next add 2 tablespoon of plain flour to the onion and potato mix, which will help to thicken the chowder along with the starch from the potatoes. Stir in and then add the wine. Use the wine to deglaze the pan (scrape bits off the bottom). When the wine has reduced by half start to gradually add the milk, whilst continually stirring.
    add white wine and gradually add milk
  • Once all the milk has gone into the pan, add the bay leaves and sprigs of thyme. Check consistency and add 100-200ml of water if the soup appears too thick.
    add bay and thyme and season
  • Bring the chowder to the boil then place on the lid and simmer for 20 minutes or until the potatoes are cooked.
  • If using fresh raw clams now is the time to get these into boiling water and cook until the shells open. Discard any unopened shells. Remove cooked clams from their shells and save a few shells for decoration later.
  • If using canned clams or the pre cooked, frozen meretrix clams then theres no need to cook these. Just remove the shells from the defrosted meretrix clams and save a few shells to use as decoration later.
  • Once the potatoes are soft add the cooked clams to the chowder. Check consistency again and add water if required. Bring the chowder back to a simmer and cook for a couple of minutes to ensure the clams are fully heated through.
    remove cooked clams from their shells and add to the chowder
  • Take the chowder off the heat and allow to cool for a couple of minute before stirring in the cream.
    take off heat and stir in the cream

IMPORTANT TIP:

  • don't add the cream whilst the chowder is still on the heat as this will cause the cream to curdle.

Serve:

  • Add any saved shells for decoration and then top with bacon and freshly chopped parsley. Serve with sourdough bread.
    add in shells for decoration then top with bacon and fresh parsley

Recipe tip:

  • If you are using frozen, cooked clams and you don't have time to defrost them you can add the frozen clams in their shells directly to the chowder. This of course means that all clams will be in shells when you serve the dish. - And although this looks pretty it makes eating this recipe a little more time consuming. You will also need a bigger pan and the clams should be simmered for longer to ensure they are fully reheated.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 338g | Calories: 445.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 30.7g | Saturated Fat: 17.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8.6g | Sodium: 600mg | Sugar: 7.2g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy clam chowder; New England style. Made with frozen meretrix clams, smoked bacon and a creamy white wine sauce

The post Clam Chowder (Recipe video + Step-by-Step guide) appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/clam-chowder/feed/ 0
How to make Sushi Rice https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/ https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/#respond Thu, 23 May 2019 23:03:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=14173 This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home. [feast_advanced_jump_to] In order to make perfect sushi rolls you first need to make perfect sushi...

Read More

The post How to make Sushi Rice appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home.

nori and rice being rolled with a bamboo mat

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

In order to make perfect sushi rolls you first need to make perfect sushi rice. Rice that is specifically prepared for sushi is called Sumeshi. This means rice thats cooked for the right amount of time, in the right amount of water. It should be sticky but still al dente, shiny and not mashed together.

Here, I'll show you how to cook and season your sushi rice and i'll share my tips for handling sushi rice so it doesn't stick to everything. - Give it chance and it will get everywhere - your worktop, your floor, your hair, most definitely your hands - everywhere.

🍚 Which rice is best for making sushi rolls?

Short grain Japanese rice is the only rice you should be using for this sushi rice recipe. Most shops and supermarkets will sell bags of rice that are labelled as sushi rice. I highly recommend using the rice that is labelled as such, otherwise you run the risk of using a type that won't be sticky enough when cooked. If you struggle to find 'sushi rice' look for a medium grained white rice, usually named Nishiki.

Sushi rice spread onto a nori sheet with black sesame seeds sprinkled on top

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & recipe instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make approximately 600g of cooked sushi rice (enough to make sushi for 4 people) you will need the following:

  • 300g dried Sushi rice (Nishiki)
  • 400ml tap water (for cooking rice)
  • 2 tbsp Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tbsp Mirin rice wine
  • 1 tsp Caster sugar
  • ½ tsp Salt

Substitutions: if you can't get hold of Mirin rice wine replace half of the Mirin with extra rice wine vinegar and the other half with extra sugar.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. First weigh out 300g of rice then transfer to a sieve and rinse under the tap until the water runs clear.
  2. Transfer to a small pan and add 400ml of tap water for every 300g of dried rice. Leave the rice to soak in the pan for 30 minutes.
  3. After 30 minutes of soaking, the rice can be cooked. Place a lid on the pan and then put the pan on the stove. Bring to the boil then turn down to a simmer and cook for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes take the pan off the heat and leave for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  4. After 10 minutes remove the lid and transfer the cooked rice to a large mixing bowl. cooked rice being transferred from a pan into a mixing bowl
  5. Whilst still warm add 2 tablespoons rice wine vinegar, 2 tablespoons Mirin rice wine, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and ½ teaspoon salt. Carefully mix and fold together well, allowing all the seasoning to fully coat the rice.adding sugar to rice
  6. The rice should be shiny and sticky with each grain separate and not mashed together. Ideally rice should be used at room temperature, so keep folding and mixing until the rice has cooled. The rice can then be used right away or if you're not ready to use it immediately, place a damp cloth over the bowl to stop the rice drying out.Sushi rice in a bowl with mirin, rice wine and sugar added

🍣 Is this recipe gluten free?

Extra care should be taken if you are wanting to make gluten free sushi. Although the rice is gluten free the rice vinegars used as the seasoning may not be. Always check the labels and try to find gluten free vinegars.

🍙 How to handle the prepared rice

Prepared sushi rice can be difficult to handle due to its sticky nature. The best way to handle cooked sushi rice is with wet hands. When you are ready to start making the sushi, set up your stall with a bowl of water at side. Use this to keep dipping and rinsing your hands as you work with the rice.

The water can also be used when it comes to cut the sushi. Dip the tip of the knife into the water then hold it up to allow the water to run down the blade. The water on the blade will allow for a clean cut on the sushi and prevent the nori from tearing.

Types of sushi

Once the rice is made it can be used to make all kinds of sushi including maki sushi, California rolls, Dragon rolls and nigiri sushi.

Sushi rice in a bowl

💭 Recipe tips

Rinse the dried sushi rice: Rinse the rice thoroughly before cooking to remove any surface starch which can make the rice too sticky once cooked.

Soak the rice before cooking: Before placing the rice and water on the stove to cook, allow it to soak for 30 minutes first. Soaking will encourage the rice to absorb water and will allow for a more even cooking when it is introduced to heat.

Leave the rice to rest: After cooking the rice allow it to sit in the pan with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Any remaining moisture will be fully absorbed and redistributed, resulting in a more even texture throughout the rice.

Add the rice seasoning whilst still warm: Add the vinegar, Mirin, salt and sugar to the rice whilst it is still warm so the flavours will absorb into each grain as it cools.

Gently fold the rice: Fold the rice gently with a wooden spoon, try to separate the rice grains rather than mixing together. If you have one, use a rice paddle rather than a spoon. Continue to fold until the rice is fully cooled.

Cover rice until ready to use: If you aren't using the rice right away, cover with a damp tea towel to stop the rice from drying out.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment or star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on Pinterest. Or if you prefer you can pin the video.

 under 300 calories recipe1 hour to produce recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

cooked sushi rice spread on nori and being rolled with a bamboo mat
Print

📋 How to make sushi rice

This simple guide will show you how to make sushi rice; cooked and mixed to perfection ready for making your very own sushi rolls. A quick sushi rice recipe, which will ensure the best start to making sushi at home.
Course Dinner, lunch, party food, side, Snack, starter
Cuisine Asian, Japanese
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 274.1kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Small pan to cook the rice
  • Mixing bowl and wooden spoon

Ingredients

  • 300 g dried Sushi rice Nishiki
  • 400 ml tap water for cooking rice
  • 2 tablespoon Rice wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Mirin rice wine
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • ½ teaspoon Salt

Instructions

  • First weigh out 300g of rice then transfer to a sieve and rinse under the tap until the water runs clear.
  • Transfer to a small pan and add 400ml of tap water for every 300g of dried rice. Leave the rice to soak in the pan for 30 minutes.
  • After 30 minutes of soaking, the rice can be cooked. Place a lid on the pan and then put the pan on the stove. Bring to the boil then turn down to a simmer and cook for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes take the pan off the heat and leave for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • After 10 minutes remove the lid and transfer the cooked rice to a large mixing bowl.
  • Whilst still warm add 2 tablespoons rice wine vinegar, 2 tablespoons Mirin rice wine, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and ½ teaspoon salt. Carefully mix and fold together well, allowing all the seasoning to fully coat the rice.
  • The rice should be shiny and sticky with each grain separate and not mashed together. Ideally rice should be used at room temperature, so keep folding and mixing until the rice has cooled. The rice can then be used right away or if you're not ready to use it immediately, place a damp cloth over the bowl to stop the rice drying out.

Video

Notes

Rinse the dried sushi rice: Rinse the rice thoroughly before cooking to remove any surface starch which can make the rice too sticky once cooked.
Soak the rice before cooking: Before placing the rice and water on the stove to cook, allow it to soak for 30 minutes first. Soaking will encourage the rice to absorb water and will allow for a more even cooking when it is introduced to heat.
Leave the rice to rest: After cooking the rice allow it to sit in the pan with the lid still on for 10 minutes. Any remaining moisture will be fully absorbed and redistributed, resulting in a more even texture throughout the rice.
Add the rice seasoning whilst still warm: Add the vinegar, Mirin, salt and sugar to the rice whilst it is still warm so the flavours will absorb into each grain as it cools.
Gently fold the rice: Fold the rice gently with a wooden spoon, try to separate the rice grains rather than mixing together. If you have one, use a rice paddle rather than a spoon. Continue to fold until the rice is fully cooled.
Cover rice until ready to use: If you aren't using the rice right away, cover with a damp tea towel to stop the rice from drying out.
sushi rice - nutrition label

Nutrition

Serving: 158g | Calories: 274.1kcal | Carbohydrates: 65.5g | Protein: 4.8g | Fat: 0.8g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 80mg | Potassium: 66.8mg | Fiber: 1.1g | Sugar: 1.8g | Calcium: 4.1mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post How to make Sushi Rice appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/how-to-make-sushi-rice/feed/ 0
Chicken Noodle Soup https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/#respond Fri, 12 Nov 2021 14:17:56 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10082 Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite! 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up...

Read More

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!

A large pan of chicken noodle soup with chopped vegetables and fresh parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Chicken noodle soup is a great recipe for using up the week’s leftovers. Not only is this soup recipe full of vegetables its also perfect for using the more budget-friendly cuts of chicken, like chicken legs and thighs.

The recipe below uses three large chicken thighs with the skins on, and chopped up onion, carrot and celery. Cooked up in large pan, these ingredients combine to create a full flavoured broth, perfect for holding noodles.

🥘 Ingredients

To make chicken noodle soup you will need:

  • Skin on chicken thighs
  • Oil and dried rosemary
  • Minced garlic
  • Onion chopped
  • Carrot chopped
  • Celery chopped
  • Stock cube in water or retail pre-made stock
  • Bay leaves
  • Dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper
  • Fresh parsley

Ingredient notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If you are using cooked leftover chicken, this can just be added at the end.

Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.

Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup.

Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side. 
  2. In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
  3. Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
  4. After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.Four images showing how to make chicken noodle soup for steps 1-4.
  5. Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
  6. Top with fresh parsley and serve.add noodles

💭 Expert tips

  • If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
  • The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Does chicken soup help clear colds?

Some studies, like this study from the American College of CHEST Physicians, show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.

Is this soup gluten free?

Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.

How to store?

Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Leftover shredded chicken with noodles and chicken broth soup.

🍵 Other soup recipes:

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

chicken noodle soup
Print

Chicken Noodle Soup

Homemade chicken noodle soup is a one pan soup recipe made with juicy chicken thighs, wholesome chopped veggies and a flavourful broth. This easy chicken noodle soup is easy to make from scratch and will quickly become a weeknight favourite!
Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup, starter
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 520kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 500 g Skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts, leftover chicken or rotisserie
  • 1 tablespoon oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 3 cloves minced garlic
  • 120 g chopped onion 1 medium onion
  • 150 g chopped carrot 2 medium carrots
  • 150 g chopped celery 4 sticks
  • 500 ml chicken stock
  • 2 Bay leaves
  • 180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • 4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pan fry the chicken thighs in oil and rosemary until skin is browned, then remove the thighs from the pan and set to one side.
    500 g Skin on chicken thighs, 1 tablespoon oil, ½ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • In the same pan add the minced garlic, chopped onion, carrot and celery and fry until soft.
    3 cloves minced garlic, 120 g chopped onion, 150 g chopped carrot, 150 g chopped celery
  • Add the stock to the vegetables and bring to a simmer. When simmering return the thighs to the pan along with 2 bay leaves, pop on the lid and cook for 20 minutes.
    500 ml chicken stock, 2 Bay leaves
  • After 20 minutes, remove the thighs from the pan. Add the dried noodles to the broth and simmer until noodles are cooked through. Separate the chicken meat from the skin and bones and then shred the meat. Skin and bones can be discarded.
    180 g dried medium egg noodles
  • Once the noodles are cooked stir in the cooked shredded chicken and season to taste.
    Salt and pepper to taste
  • Top with fresh parsley and serve.
    4 tablespoon Fresh parsley

Video

Notes

Chicken: Any cut of chicken will work well in this recipe from leftover Sunday dinner chicken to freshly cut chicken breast. If using pre cooked leftover or rotisserie chicken; skip step 1 and instead of adding the thighs in step 3 just move to adding the noodles. Shred your cooked chicken and add at the end.
Vegetables: Onion, carrot and celery are the basic veg that add a great flavour to any one pot recipe. I recommend using at least these three vegetable. But you have any other leftover veg lying around then definitely chop it up and pop it in as well.
Stock: Choose a good quality stock as this will make the base of soup. The stock can reduce down quite quickly, so have extra hot water available to top up the soup as it cooks.
Noodles: Medium noodles are a good option for this recipe as they hold together well in the soup.
Does chicken soup help clear colds? Some studies show that chicken noodle soup can help clear nasal passageways, which is helpful when you have a cold. This is thought to be due to the heat, the aroma, and the taste.
This recipe is also generally high in protein, vitamins and minerals, and so provides a well-balanced meal promoting general wellness.
Is this soup gluten free? Egg noodles and some brands of stock can contain gluten. For a gluten free recipe replace the noodles with rice noodles and use a gluten free stock.
How to store? Completely cool then store in air tight container in the fridge for up to 3 days or the freezer for up to 3 months. Noodles tend to not freeze and reheat well. So if you plan to freeze this recipe, leave out the noodles. Instead, add the noodles in when you have defrosted and are reheating the soup. Defrost thoroughly and reheat in a pan until piping hot.

Nutrition

Serving: 476g | Calories: 520kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 378mg | Potassium: 752mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 6889IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was first published in Jul 2019. Updated in Nov 2021 with new step by step instructions and expert tips.

I first shared Chicken Noodle Soup on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Chicken Noodle Soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chicken-noodle-soup/feed/ 0
Green Bean Almondine https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/ https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/#respond Thu, 22 Aug 2019 12:21:09 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10523 Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy...

Read More

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Meet your new favourite side dish. It sounds so fancy but it is such a simple recipe for green beans and almonds. Crisp green bean almondine is an easy side dish made extra special with the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds! You are going to love eating your greens with these delicious and crispy green beans with almonds.

Green bean almondine

What is green bean almondine?

This recipe is a classic french dish and is simply green beans with almonds. The name has been adapted from the original French term of ‘amandine’ meaning 'a garnish of almonds’.

As nice and simple as all that sounds, in order to make this the best green bean recipe, there are a few extra additions that can really bring it to life. This mainly involves pan frying the almonds in butter and lemon juice. The lemon juice reduces into the butter and creates a sweet caramelised sauce. So delicious!

My own twist, which I really feel does make this the best green been almondine recipe ever, is the addition of freshly chopped dill. The subtle flavour of this unobtrusive herb partners so well with the sour lemon and creamy almonds.

green bean almondine with almond garnish

Green Bean Almondine Ingredients

To make this recipe you will need just 5 ingredients, plus a bit of seasoning. Keep in mind, fresh green beans are best for this recipe. They’re easy to prepare and deliciously crisp.

  • 200g Green Beans
  • 50g Butter
  • 50g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill
  • salt and pepper

Green bean almondine in the pan

How to prepare the green beans

Preparing green beans is not a difficult task at all. Plus, fresh green beans are well worth it for their crisp texture and flavour. Follow these guidelines and you’ll be cooking fresh green beans for your green bean almondine in no time!

  1. How to trim green beans

    Trimming green beans needn’t be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay – no trimming required.

    • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side.
    • Use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.
  2. How to clean green beans

As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

This green bean recipe is one of the easiest you’ll find. It takes just a few steps and is well worth the end result.

  1. The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.add water to green beans and simmer
  2. After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  3. Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.add flaked almond to butter
  4. Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  5. Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds.add blanched green beans into the butter and almond mix
  6. Stir in some fresh dill and season. Then serve immediately.add fresh dill

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.

The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.

When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

green bean almondine side dish

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a simple roast chicken, a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

For dessert, depending on the time of year, try this delicious Bakewell tart with raspberry jam, apple dump cake with fresh apples. pumpkin cobbler with spiced butter toffee, healthy banana bread with week old bananas, strawberry rhubarb crisp, or peach cobbler with cake mix.

Green bean almondine with buttery almonds

So next time you’re stuck for ideas on what to serve with dinner, why not give this fabulous side dish a try.

 Recipe low in carbshigh in nutrients recipegluten free recipe

📖 Recipe

green bean almondine
Print

Green bean almondine

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens - this surly must be it!
Course Appetizer, Side Dish, starter
Cuisine French
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 182.6kcal

Ingredients

  • 200 g Green Beans
  • 50 g Butter
  • 50 g flaked almonds
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • Fresh dill (Handful)
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

How to trim green beans

  • Trimming green beans needn't be a hassle. The ends that need to go are the ones with the remaining stems (where the bean was attached to the plant). The thinner tapered end can stay - no trimming required.
  • Line the bean up so the stem ends are all together on the same side, use your hand to line up evenly then slice the stem tips off with a sharp knife.

How to clean green beans

  • As with most veg, fruits and salads, green beans can be rinsed under cold tap water to ensure any debris and dirt has been washed away.

How to Make Green Bean Almondine

  • The first important step in this recipe is how to boil green beans correctly so they stay crisp and bright green. Start by adding washed and trimmed green beans to a small pan. Add boiling water from the kettle and simmer on the stove for 2 minutes.
    add water to green beans and simmer
  • After 2 minutes immediately drain the water and plunge the green beans into iced water to stop the cooking process and to help keep the green beans crisp and bright in colour.
    place blanched green beans in iced water to stop cooking process
  • Next, place a frying pan on a medium heat and add 50g of butter. Once the butter has melted add the flaked almonds and toss together. Fry for 5 minutes, allowing the almonds to lightly brown.
    add flaked almond to butter
  • Add a squeeze of lemon juice and then take off the heat. RECIPE NOTE: Adding the juice will cause the butter to simmer and reduce rapidly, this further browns the butter and almonds. Removing the pan from the heat prevents burning.
    squeeze over juice from half a lemon
  • Drain the green beans from the iced water. Add to the pan and toss with the buttered almonds. Stir in some fresh dill, season, and then serve immediately.
    add fresh dill

Video

Notes

Click here to see traffic light nutritional info for this recipe

Can I make green beans almondine ahead of time?

This recipe should ideally be served immediately from the pan. However, there are couple of preparatory steps you can undertake ahead of time. The initial blanching of the beans is finished by plunging the beans into iced water (see steps 1 and 2 above). Once the beans are fully cooled they can be transferred to a container and stored in the fridge for up to 24 hours or until needed.
The lemon and dill can be sliced and the butter and almonds can be weighed out and also all stored in the fridge.
When ready to serve, all that remains is melting the butter in the pan, cooking the almonds for 5 minutes and then adding the lemon juice, beans and dill.

What to Serve with Green Bean Almondine

The best thing about this recipe is that its a side dish that will go with almost any meal. Be it a creamy chicken and leek recipe or foil pack salmon or even a Thai red curry, green bean almondine is a great side dish to have at the table.  This recipe also partners really well with other side dishes like foil pack potatoes or honey glazed carrots and parsnips. You could also pair it with slow cooker applesauce and any of the main dishes above.

Nutrition

Serving: 82g | Calories: 182.6kcal | Carbohydrates: 2.6g | Protein: 3.9g | Fat: 17.5g | Saturated Fat: 7.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 200mg | Fiber: 1.7g | Sugar: 1.8g

This recipe was inspired by a recipe from Family Foodie. I first shared this Green bean almondine recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

PIN FOR LATER

Crisp green bean almondine, a simple side dish, which is made extra special by the addition of buttery, pan fried almonds and a sprinkling of dill. If there was ever a reason to start eating your greens – this surely must be it!

The post Green Bean Almondine appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/green-bean-almondine/feed/ 0
Cauliflower soup https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/ https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/#respond Fri, 15 Nov 2019 14:40:54 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11419 Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just...

Read More

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.

Cauliflower soup recipe

Can you make this recipe without cream?

Although most soups will benefit tremendously from a big dollop of cream, cauliflower soup is one of those recipes that can manage a velvety, creamy finish all on its own. Admittedly, there is some semi skimmed that goes into this soup recipe, but the rest of that delicious, creaminess is from the cauliflower itself. Give it 20 minutes to simmer in some stock, or 15 minutes to roast in the oven and the soft, fluffy florets will blitz down into an irresistibly, creamy soup in a matter of seconds.

 

Whether you use roasted cauliflower of cauliflower boiled in veggie stock, the results will always be the same - full flavoured and velvety smooth. However, see the end of this post if you are looking to make a cream of cauliflower soup recipe.

healthy cauliflower soup recipe

Ingredients for cauliflower soup

This easy soup recipe requires just a few simple ingredients, many of which I already had at home:

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots (or 6 small) (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower (600g) leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450ml vegetable stock
  • 300ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning
easy cauliflower soup

How to make cauliflower soup

  1. Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  2. Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelisedfrying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  3. Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.adding cauliflower florets to the fried shallots
  4. Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk. adding stock to the pan adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  5. Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft. soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  6. Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
  7. Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend.
  8. Add more liquid to thin out and reach your desired consistency. cooked soup transferred to a food processor soup blended until smooth
  9. Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
  10. Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.soup served and seasoned
  11. Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Different types of cauliflower soup

This recipe is the most basic of soup recipes and is pretty damn good just as it is. However, cauliflower is a versatile vegetable and so if you're looking for a soup with a bit more punch, why not try one of the options below:

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make this soup spicy

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander.

Curried soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

Roasted cauliflower gives this soup and extra layer of smokey, nutty flavours, which is especially good combined with the melted cheese or curry spices from the above ideas. Simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

Roasted cauliflower is also fantastic in a roasted cauliflower salad.

creamy cauliflower soup

How to make this recipe super creamy

This recipe is one thats creamy all on its own. The mild flavour and soft texture of the cauliflower means that a quick blitz in the blender will give a lusciously creamy result every time. However, if you are looking for extra creaminess or even wanting to call your soup 'cream of cauliflower' then you may want to add in a little cream.

To make this soup a cream of cauliflower recipe simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Cauliflower soup without cream

Can you freeze this recipe?

This soup recipe can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.

Other homemade soup recipes to try:

📖 Recipe

cauliflower soup
Print

Cauliflower Soup

Creamy cauliflower soup is the perfect healthy recipe for when you need a quick nutritious meal and a helping of something that's warm and comforting. This cauliflower soup recipe has no stodgy ingredients or full fat cream but still provides rich and creamy flavours from its caramelised shallots and fluffy cauliflower. Its made with just a few simple and healthy ingredients and can be on the table in under 30 minutes.
Course Appetizer, starter or main
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 114.7kcal

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Food processor or hand blender

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped
  • 3 large banana shallots or 6 small (150g) roughly diced
  • 1 medium cauliflower 600g leaves removed and chopped into small florets
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 450 ml vegetable stock
  • 300 ml semi skimmed milk
  • Seasoning and crusty bread to serve

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large saucepan. Add a clove of finely chopped garlic and 150g of roughly chopped shallots. Fry gently until soft.
  • Recipe tip: for extra flavour, fry the shallots in the pan until caramelised
    frying chopped garlic and shallots in oil
  • Next, add the cauliflower florets and half a teaspoon of ground nutmeg.
    adding ground nutmeg to the soup pan
  • Then pour in 450ml of veg stock and 300ml of semi skimmed milk.
    adding semi skimmed milk to the pan
  • Gently bring the soup to the boil and then cover and simmer for 20 minutes or until cauliflower is soft.
    soup brought to the boil and covered with a lid
  • Transfer the contents of the pan to a processor and blend until smooth.
    cooked soup transferred to a food processor
  • Recipe tip: Add the chunky parts of the soup to the processor first and gradually add the liquid as you blend. Add more liquid to thin out the soup and stop when you reach your desired consistency.
    soup blended until smooth
  • Return the soup to the pan to reheat if necessary, then taste and season.
    soup served and seasoned
  • Recipe tip: For a super smooth soup blend for an extra 2 minutes and then pass soup through a sieve.
  • Serve in bowls with crusty bread.

Video

Notes

How to make cauliflower cheese soup

For cauliflower cheese soup follow the recipe above and after blending return the soup to the pan. Gently reheat the soup and add 50g of grated cheddar (or your preferred hard cheese. Stir well until the cheese has fully melted. For an extra kick stir in a teaspoon of mustard or serve with a dash of Worcestershire sauce.

How to make spicy cauliflower soup

Cauliflower is a great vegetable for taking on other flavours and will soak up spices like a sponge. To make a spicy or curry-flavoured cauliflower soup follow the recipe above but coat the cauliflower with spices before adding to the pan. For a spicy kick first coat the uncooked cauliflower florets in half tablespoon oil then mix: 1 teaspoon paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper, and ½ teaspoon hot chilli powder. For something a little milder with more of a curry flavour, mix with: 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon curry powder, ½ teaspoon turmeric and 1 teaspoon ground coriander. Curried cauliflower soup is great served with freshly baked naan bread. Its also ideal for bulking out with moroccan ingredients like chickpeas: spiced cauliflower and chickpea soup.

How to make vegan cauliflower soup

To make this recipe vegan, simply replace the milk with plant milk (i.e. - almond milk) or remove the milk completely and replace with extra vegetable stock.

How to make roasted cauliflower soup

To make roasted cauliflower soup, simply coat the raw cauliflower florets in oil (and spices if you like) then roast on a tray in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the edges are just starting to char. Then continue with the recipe above, the only difference being that you will only need to simmer the soup for 10 minutes, rather than 20 minutes, before blending.

How to make cauliflower soup creamy

To make cream of cauliflower soup simply return your soup to the pan after blending and gently reheat. Once its piping hot remove from the heat and stir in 150ml of double cream, then serve. Alternatively you could stir in 3 tablespoon of soured cream (particularly good if you've made the spicy or curried cauliflower soup), or replace the milk in this recipe with a can of coconut milk for a creamy cauliflower and coconut soup - delicious.

Can you freeze cauliflower soup?

Cauliflower soup can be frozen for up to 3 months. Once your soup is fully cooled transfer to sealable containers and pop into the freezer. Defrost thoroughly before reheating, either on the side for a few hours or in the microwave for 5 - 10 minutes with lid removed. Then gently reheat in a pan until the soup just about boils.
Nutritional info cauliflower soup

Nutrition

Serving: 378g | Calories: 114.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 11.7g | Protein: 9.6g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.5g | Sodium: 280mg | Fiber: 3.2g | Sugar: 9.5g

PIN FOR LATER

Creamy cauliflower soup recipe

The post Cauliflower soup appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cauliflower-soup/feed/ 0
Chocolate Muffins https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/ https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/#comments Mon, 23 Dec 2019 15:49:17 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=11735 Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.   This is the best brownie...

Read More

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  

Chocolate muffins

This is the best brownie recipe if your after super quick muffins with plenty of chocolate. These muffins have all the qualities of chocolate brownies but are so much quicker and easier to serve up. They also allow for a bit of extra decoration if you are wanting to make chocolate brownies for handing out at a special occasion.

Chocolate muffins for 'bun in the oven' baby announcement

My own special reason for creating this delicious collection of chocolate muffins was to announce my pregnancy - 'Bun in the oven style'. I just had to do something food related 🙂

Baby boy Jones due 21st April 2020!! Very exciting 🙂 

Bun in the oven baby announcement

Is chocolate brownie, cake?

Chocolate brownie is dense and crumbly and so considered to be a bar or biscuit rather than cake. Usually chocolate brownie is eaten with your fingers as whereas cake is eaten with a fork or spoon.

What do you bake brownies in?

If you are making chocolate brownie in a slab that you can cut up into portions its best to use a square or rectangular cake tin (9 inch). Have a look at this chocolate brownies recipe for further details. However, in the case of this recipe the chocolate brownie mix is baked in muffin cases. Brownie muffins have the same texture and density as a normal piece of brownie and so will come out slightly heavier than a normal sponge muffin or cupcake.

TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Easy brownie recipe

Chocolate for brownies

The best chocolate for making brownie chocolate muffins is cooking chocolate and cocoa powder. Cooking chocolate will melt down smoothly and quickly and the cocoa powder will provide that intense flavour brownies are so well known for. Extra chocolate can also be added to brownies - and why not. Brownies are all about the chocolate and I love to add in white chocolate chips.

Brownie cakes

Ingredients for chocolate brownies

  • 220g Unsalted butter
  • 280g Cooking chocolate (milk)
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300g Golden caster sugar
  • 100g Plain flour
  • 100g cocoa powder
  • 100g white chocolate chips (optional) (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

How to make chocolate muffins

These decadent brownie chocolate muffins are made with an easy brownie recipe, which takes minutes to mix together: 

  1. Pre heat oven to 180 degrees C (fan). Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  2. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted. Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  3. In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  4. Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  5. Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  6. Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  7. Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  8. Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven
  9. Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool. 
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.  

Frosting for chocolate brownies

The topping used in this chocolate muffins recipe is a simple vanilla mascarpone cream, with just 4 ingredients and whisked up in seconds. To make Vanilla mascarpone cream you will need:

  • 225g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste ( or seeds of 1 vanilla pod)
  • Icing sugar to taste
  1. Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking. mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  2. Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies. NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins

  3. Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Frequently asked questions about brownie chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your chocolate muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie chocolate muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.

Other cake and muffin recipes you might like:

 1 hour to produce recipevegetarian recipeunder 400 calories recipeChristmas Recipe

📖 Recipe

chocolate brownie muffins
Print

Chocolate muffins

Brownie chocolate muffins topped with vanilla mascarpone cream. These chocolate muffins are perfect for when you want chocolate brownies but don't want the hassle of cutting up a huge crumbly slab of the stuff. Theres no worry over burnt edges and you can even add a bit of cream frosting.  
Course Dessert, pudding, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 16 muffins
Calories 361.2kcal

Equipment

  • Large Microwaveable bowl
  • Large mixing bowl
  • Whisk
  • Muffin tin
  • Muffin cases
  • Piping bag with nozzle for frosting

Ingredients

For the chocolate muffins

  • 220 g Unsalted butter
  • 280 g Cooking chocolate milk
  • 4 Medium eggs
  • 300 g Golden caster sugar
  • 100 g Plain flour
  • 100 g cocoa powder
  • 100 g white chocolate chips optional (or add milk chocolate chips/chunks or chopped hazelnuts)

For the Mascarpone cream frosting

  • 225 g Mascarpone cheese
  • 75 ml Double cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste or seeds of 1 vanilla pod
  • Icing sugar to taste

Instructions

To make the chocolate brownie muffins

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C
  • Cut up the butter into chunks and add to a microwavable bowl, along with 280g cooking milk chocolate broken into chunks. Microwave in 30 second bursts, stirring in between until fully melted.
    NOTE: with the butter mixed in it won’t take long for this to fully melt - so make sure you keep an eye on it and don’t over heat.
    cubed butter and cooking chocolate in a bowl
  • Place melted chocolate to one side to cool slightly
    butter and chocolate melted in a bowl
  • In a large mixing bowl whisk together 4 eggs and and 300g sugar. The mixing of sugar and eggs is known as a sabayon and a proper sabayon is achieved by whisking quickly and evenly until the mix turns pale and begins to ribbon with the movement of the whisk.
    whisking together eggs and sugar - known as a sabayon
  • Next pour the melted chocolate into the sabayon and stir in well.
    stirring melted chocolate into the whisked sugar and eggs
  • Sift in the flour and the cocoa powder and gently stir in with a spatula until fully combined.
    NOTE: the mixture will be very stiff and seem quite dry but keep stirring and the mixture will come together.
    folding flour and cocoa into the brownie mix
  • Add the white chocolate chips and stir in well to distribute evenly.
    stirring white chocolate chips into brownie mix
  • Place muffin cases into the muffin tin then spoon the brownie mix into the cases. Each case should be filled with around 1 heaped tablespoon of the mixture (case will be ¾ full). Use a second spoon to scrap the mixture into the case. This recipe will be enough to fill around 16 muffin cases.
    spooning browning mix into muffin cases
  • Place muffins into the pre heated oven and cook for 25 minutes.
    TIP: cook for 20 minute if you would like the centre of your muffins to be slightly gooey.
  • Remove from the oven and allow to completely cool.
    NOTE: Brownies will firm up as they cool - so don’t worry if they seem a bit ‘wobbly’ when you pull them out of the oven.
    chocolate muffins fresh out of the oven

To make the mascarpone cream topping

  • Place the mascarpone, double cream and vanilla in a mixing bowl and stir together until well combined and smooth. Taste and mix in icing sugar to your liking.
    mascarpone cheese, cream and vanilla in a bowl
  • Transfer the cream to a piping bag with nozzle and pipe onto the top of completely cooled brownies.
    NOTE: if brownies aren’t completely cool the cream will melt and run off the muffins.
    piping mascarpone cream onto chocolate muffins
  • Dust with cocoa powder and serve.

Video

Notes

Nutritional info chocolate muffins

How do you make gooey chocolate muffins?

To make your muffins slightly gooey in the middle, bake for just 20 minutes instead of the 25 minutes suggested in the recipe. The muffins will look under cooked at this point but they will set as they cool, leaving the middle slightly gooey.

Can you freeze chocolate brownie muffins?

Once baked allow the brownie muffins to cool completely then wrap in cling film or place in a container with a lid. Freeze for up to 3 months. When ready to eat, remove from the freezer and allow to defrost on the side over night.

Can you make these chocolate muffins in advance?

Yes these chocolate muffins can be made up to 5 days in advance. Once made, allow to completely cool then store in an air tight container.
TIP: Make sure the brownies are fully cooled before removing from the muffin cases. If the muffins are still warm the brownie will stick to the case and break up as you try to remove it.

Nutrition

Serving: 84g | Calories: 361.2kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 5.5g | Fat: 21.5g | Saturated Fat: 15.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7.4g | Sodium: 40mg | Fiber: 0.7g | Sugar: 33.3g

PIN FOR LATER

chocolate muffins made with a chocolate brownie recipe and topped with vanilla mascarpone cream

The post Chocolate Muffins appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/chocolate-muffins/feed/ 4
Lemon Drizzle Cake https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/ https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/#respond Sun, 23 Feb 2020 23:17:44 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=12398 Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll...

Read More

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Lemon drizzle made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.

lemon drizzle cake with one piece sliced off at the front and lemons and fresh mint in the background

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

This is a super easy cake recipe that can be in the oven and smelling amazing in next to no time. Much like banana bread, almond carrot cake or even Christmas cake, the secret to a good cake is of course is in the mixing.

💭 Top tips

  • Before making the cake mixture, make sure the butter has been left at room temperature for a couple of hours and is soft.
  • Whip together the butter and sugar until creamy. This can take up to 10 minutes in a stand mixer and even longer if you're mixing by hand. Its so worth it though.
  • Gradually add the the beaten eggs just a bit at a time whilst still mixing the creamed butter and sugar. This usually takes a good 10 minutes. If you add the eggs too quickly the mixture will split.
  • If you're worried too much egg has gone in at any point and the mixture looks like it might split - mix in a couple of tablespoons of the self raising flour. This will bring the mixture back together and allow you to continue to add the eggs.
  • Gently hand fold in the remaining flour and zest with a spatula (don't mix in mechanically) so keeping the mixture fluffy and full of air.
  • Bake the cake in a low oven (160 degrees C / 320 degrees F) and avoid opening the oven door during the first few minutes of baking. Higher temps and opening the door can result in the cake sinking in the middle.
  • Bake for around 45 minutes or until an inserted skewer comes out clean.
  • Use fresh lemon juice and zest for the best lemon flavour. To flavour the cake use the zest from 2 lemons. Then mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of sugar and spoon over whilst the cake is still warm after baking.
  • For extra decoration and lemon flavour make lemon icing by mixing lemon juice with icing sugar and spoon or pipe over your cooled cake.
  • I like also like to add extra toppings of freshly chopped mint leaves and lemon zest.
Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing being sliced into with a knife

🥘 What you will need to make this recipe

Jump to Recipe

To make a loaf cake (10 slices) you will need the following ingredients:

  • 150g (⅔ cup) Softened butter cut into small cubes
  • 150g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 Eggs beaten
  • 200g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons (10g)
  • 2 lemons juiced and 100g (½ cup) Sugar for the drizzle
  • 100g (1 cup) icing sugar and 1 lemon juiced (15ml) for the lemon icing
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest to decorate

Reference for cup measurements

Lemon drizzle cake with lemon icing and topped with lemon zest and mint

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tinloaf cake tin lined with grease proof paper
  2. Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor. Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.butter and sugar in the stand mixer
  3. Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.Cream together butter and sugar
  4. Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 or 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix.Gradually adding beaten egg to the creamed butter and sugar
  5. After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons. Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.Self raising flour and lemon zest added to cake mixture
  6. Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.cake mixture transferred to a lined loaf tin
  7. Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.Cake baked for 45 minutes or until skewer comes out clean
  8. In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup. Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.spoon over lemon and sugar mixture
  9. Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so) remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling. Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.Sugar and lemon juice mixed together
  10. Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer. Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zestDrizzle cooled cake with lemon icing
Slice of lemon cake on a plate with the rest of the cake in the background

❓ Frequently asked questions

How long will this cake keep?

Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.

Best way to store

Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.

Can you freeze this cake?

You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night

How do you add lemon flavour to cake?

The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.

Why does my cake sink in the middle?

Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.

🍰 Other baking recipes you might like to try

📖 Recipe

lemon drizzle cake
Print

📋 Lemon Drizzle Cake

Lemon drizzle cake recipe made from scratch with fresh lemons and an easy to follow cake recipe. A lovely citrus cake thats crumbly, moist and perfect for an afternoon tea or as a celebration or birthday cake. Topped with lemon syrup, lemon icing, fresh mint and lemon zest, this really is the best lemon drizzle cake you'll ever make.
Course afternoon tea, Dessert, sweet
Cuisine British
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 1 loaf cake
Calories 273.7kcal

Equipment

  • Loaf tin
  • Greaseproof paper
  • Grater to zest lemons
  • Stand mixer or handheld mechanical whisk
  • Spatula
  • Cooling wire rack
  • Piping bag for lemon icing (optional)

Ingredients

For the lemon cake:

  • 150 g (⅔ cup) Softened butter
  • 150 g (¾ cup) Caster Sugar
  • 3 medium Eggs beaten
  • 200 g (1 ¾ cups) Self raising flour
  • Lemon zest from 2 unwaxed lemons 10g

For the lemon drizzle:

  • 2 lemons juiced
  • 100 g (½ cup) Sugar

To decorate:

  • 100 g (1 cup) icing sugar
  • 1 lemon juiced 15ml
  • Mint leaves and extra lemon zest

Instructions

  • Start by pre heating the oven to 160 degrees C / 320 degrees F. Then prepare the loaf tin by lining with greaseproof paper. Use margarine or butter to help stick the paper to the sides and base of the tin.
  • Add 150g of softened, cubed butter and 150g caster sugar to a mixing bowl or to your stand mixer/food processor.
  • Cream together the sugar and butter using the beater attachment on the stand mixer. Alternatively use a hand held whisk or food processor.
Start the mixer off slowly and as the ingredients start to combine take it up to full speed. Then mix for around 10 minutes or until the sugar and butter are creamy.
  • Gradually add 3 beaten eggs to the creamed sugar and butter, whilst keeping the mixer on high. (or add a bit of egg and then whisk in by hand before adding the next bit). Adding the egg should be done as slowly as possible and can take at least 10 minutes. 

    TIP: If you add too much egg too quickly the mixture will split and be ruined. To help avoid this you can add 1 pr 2 tablespoons of the Self raising flour, ahead of time. So make sure you already have your flour weighed out and if you're worried the mixture might split at any time - add in a bit of the flour and continue to mix. 



  • After all the egg is combined into the mixture, remove the bowl from the stand mixer. Add the self raising flour (or the remaining flour of you have already used some) and the zest of 2 unwaxed lemons.
  • Use a spatula to gently fold the flour and zest into the mixture. Ensuring that the batter stays light and fluffy.



  • Carefully transfer the cake mix to the lined loaf tin and smooth down the top using the spatula.



  • Place the loaf tin in the centre of the pre heated oven and bake for 45 minutes or until a inserted skewer comes out clean. Leave the cake in the tin for the moment.
  • 


In a small bowl mix together the juice of 2 lemons with 100g of caster sugar to form a syrup.
  • Prick the warm cake all over with a small skewer or cocktail stick. Spoon the lemon syrup all over the warm cake allowing some of the syrup to run into the holes. As the cake cools in the tin the syrup will set and crystallise on the outer edge of the cake.



  • Once the cake is cooled slightly and the lemon syrup has set (after 20 minutes or so), remove from the tin and place on a wire rack to continue cooling.
  • Next, mix together the icing sugar and juice of 1 lemon (15ml) to make lemon icing. The lemon icing is an optional step.
 Drizzle the icing over the cooled lemon drizzle cake. I used a piping bag for this but you can just spoon it over if you prefer.
  • Finally top with freshly chopped mint leaves and extra lemon zest.

Video

Notes

How long will this cake keep?
Lemon drizzle cake will keep well in a sealed container for at least 4 days - sometimes longer.
Best way to store
Lemon drizzle is best stored in an air tight container and to keep it extra fresh you can also wrap in cling film and then in foil.
Can you freeze this cake?
You can freeze lemon drizzle but I recommend you freeze the cooled cake as it is without any lemon syrup or lemon icing added. Upon defrosting the syrup and icing can be added. Freeze for up to 3 months and fully defrost at room temperature over night.
How do you add lemon flavour to cake?
The best way to add lemon flavour to a cake is to add the zest of a couple of lemons to the raw cake mix. This allows the lemon flavour to be distributed evenly and then baked with the cake. Using a dry ingredient also means that the consistency of the cake won't be altered. After baking a lemon syrup can be poured over the warm cake for a boost of extra citrus flavour.
Why does my cake sink in the middle?
Lemon drizzle cake tends to sink if its bakes at too high a temperature of if the oven door is opened repeatedly during the first 10 minutes of baking. Bake at 160 degrees C or 320 degrees F and avoid opening the oven door until most of the baking time has passed. You may check that the cake isn't catching on the top after 30 minutes.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 75g | Calories: 273.7kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 2.4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3.8g | Sodium: 120mg | Potassium: 43.4mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 36.8g | Vitamin A: 183.1IU | Vitamin C: 3.9mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Lemon Drizzle Cake appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/lemon-drizzle-cake/feed/ 0
Easy Bread Rolls Recipe https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/ https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/#comments Fri, 19 Aug 2016 12:35:00 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=2201 Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands. [feast_advanced_jump_to]...

Read More

The post Easy Bread Rolls Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands.

homemade white bread rolls made with strong bread flour

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Freshly baked bread rolls are one of lifes little joys. The dedication put into to the kneading, the anticipation of the dough rising, that amazing smell filling the house during baking and that satisfying first break into a warm, crusty, homemade bread roll. Wonderful.

This easy bread rolls recipe is a great option for anyone baking bread for the first time. Its a tried and tested traditional recipe and one that I use again and again. If bread-making is something you haven't done before or something that you've tried and decided not to attempt again; then these bread rolls are the best place to start. I found that my bread making became a little easier and more successful once I'd understood the basic principles a little better. Generally making bread is all about creating the right environment for each ingredient. 

freshly baked bread rolls cooling on a wire rack

🥘 Ingredients

Full ingredients & instructions in recipe card below: Jump to Recipe Card

To make 8 small bread rolls you will need the following:

  • 150 ml (⅔ cup) warm semi-skimmed (2%) milk
  • 1 tbsp Olive oil
  • 1 tsp Caster sugar
  • 225g (1 ½ cups) Strong white bread flour
  • 1 tsp Crushed sea salt
  • 10g Fresh yeast or 7g (2 ¼ tsp) sachet of dried yeast
  • Extra oil for oiling work surface and bowl (do not use flour)
  • 1 egg and a splash of milk for glazing.
  • Poppy seeds or sesame seeds to decorate (optional)

Reference for cup measures

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Gently warm 150ml of semi-skimmed (2%) milk to body temperature (37°C), either on the stove or in the microwave. Test temperature with your finger. If it feels to hot allow to cool before using.
  2. Next add 1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon caster sugar and the yeast to the milk. Stir gently to dissolve. Leave for a couple of minutes to allow the yeast to activate.
  3. Sieve the flour and salt into a large mixing bowl and mix well.
  4. Next add the milk and yeast mixture to the flour a little at a time (add ¾ initially) and mix using finger tips or a wooden spoon. Add enough liquid until it starts to come together and forms a nice sticky dough. Gradually add remaining milk making sure all the yeast has been added. Use luke warm water if more liquid is required (better to be too wet than too dry).
  5. Drizzle a bit of oil on a clean work surface to prevent the dough from sticking. Turn the dough out onto the oiled work surface and knead for 10 minutes by hand until smooth and elastic.
  6. The 1st prove: Place the dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with cling film and leave in a warm place to double in bulk, this will take approx. 1 hour.
  7. After an hour remove the cling film and hit dough firmly with your hand to knock back. This will release the built up CO2. Turn out onto the work surface and use finger tips to flatten then roll into an even sausage shape. Use a large knife to halve, halve again and halve again into 8 even pieces.
  8. To create the roll shape place the first piece of dough on the work surface and then place the flat of your hand on top. Make a circular motion and gradually move in your thumb and allow knuckles to rise, creating a smooth sphere. Make sure you press quite firmly in order to remove creases. Repeat with each piece of dough.
  9. The 2nd prove: Place the rolls onto a lined or greased baking tray. Brush rolls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a bit of milk) and sprinkle with sesame seeds or poppy seeds if desired. Cover tray with lightly oiled cling film. Leave them in a warm place until they appear well risen (30 mins).
  10. Pre heat the oven to 180°C (FAN) (350°F) whilst waiting for the second prove.
  11. After 30 minutes you should see a rise to the bread rolls. Add a tiny pinch of sea salt to the top of each roll then bake for 25 minutes - check at 15 minutes. Bake until the bread sounds hollow when tapped on the bottom.
  12. Cool on a rack before devouring. And don't forget to enjoy that freshly baked bread smell! 

🍞 Why do we use yeast to make bread?

The most important ingredient in bread making is the yeast, which is the thing that makes bread rise. Yeast will activate and produce carbon dioxide when given food (sugar), warmth and moisture (milk). Bread rises as carbon dioxide is produced and becomes trapped.

I prefer to use fresh yeast; mainly because its completely free! All supermarkets with a bakery will prepare bread using fresh yeast and will generally have a mountain of it. Supermarkets can't sell yeast as its a live product, but they can give it to customers for free upon request. Usually fresh yeast will keep in a sealed bag or container, in the fridge for 2-3 weeks.

However, theres nothing wrong with dried yeast and either can be used in this recipe. Just remember that you will need to use a little more fresh yeast compared to dried.

It is also important to know that high temperatures or too much salt can kill the yeast. Just like us, yeast is at its happiest at around 37°C. So at the start of this recipe its important to only warm the milk to around body temperature. (Use a thermometer to double check if you are unsure and allow it to cool if it is too hot).

🥖 What is gluten?

Gluten is the protein that allows bread to stretch as carbon dioxide is released from the yeast. The gluten protein is formed when 2 other proteins, present in flour, come together during kneading. Bread flour contains higher amounts of these proteins.

💭 Recipe tips

Fully dissolve the yeast: Fresh yeast can sink to the bottom of the liquid and not fully dissolve. Check this by mixing with your finger tips - tracing the bottom of the milk vessel ensuring no clumps of yeast are stuck at the bottom.

Mix the salt into the flour rather than the milk: Salt will add flavour to the rolls but can kill the yeast, so best to mix and disperse this in the flour before the milk is added. 

Use oil not flour on your work surface: When kneading the dough use oil on the work surface to stop it sticking. Don’t use flour as this will dry out the dough and a sticky dough is preferable when bread making.

To make evenly sized bread rolls: To create evenly sized bread rolls you can weigh each piece of dough once you have halved into 8 pieces. However, rolling the dough into a sausage and then halving 3 times is usually pretty accurate. 

To make crusty bread rolls: To create a better crust on your rolls you can spray the inside of the oven with water at regular intervals during baking. Or place a roasting tin at the bottom of the oven and fill with water at the start of baking.

❓Frequently asked questions

Why does the milk need to be warm?

The warm milk allows the yeast to activate. However, if its too hot (more than body temperature) it will kill the yeast.

Why is there sugar in this recipe?

Sugar added to the milk will feed the yeast and help it to activate properly. Yeast needs food, warmth and moisture to activate. The sugar is the food and the milk is the warmth and moisture.

Why do we knead dough?

Kneading is one of most important stages in bread making and provides the opportunity for the two proteins found in flour to come together and form gluten. It also allows the yeast to work its magic and release carbon dioxide (CO2). Use power from your shoulder to knead thoroughly, the dough will go slightly whiter as you knead. Stretch out to see if snaps or stretches, continue kneading until the dough becomes nice and stretchy.

How long should I knead the dough?

Dough should be kneaded for at least 10 minutes. You will know when the dough has been kneaded enough when it becomes stretchy and elastic. The best test is to roll the dough into a ball and then press firmly into the centre with your finger. The dough should bounce back.

Why does bread need to be proved twice?

Allowing the dough to prove just means to rest it and give it the opportunity to rise. Over proofing can produce unstructured or uneven bread. So the 1st prove should only be for around 1 hour. Knocking back (hitting the risen dough with your hand) removes the air meaning the dough can be handled again and shaped. A second prove allows the shaped dough to rise again, this usually requires less time (around 30 minutes).

When are the bread rolls ready?

To test if the rolls are cooked through, carefully turn over and tap on the bottom. The roll should sounds hollow.

Why is my bread heavy?

The main cause of heavy or dense bread is a lack of rise. Bread can have a reduced rise for a number of reasons including not enough protein, not kneaded for long enough, left to prove for too long, too much salt.
- Not enough protein in the bread would mean less gluten and so not as much CO2 can be trapped. The protein content comes from the flour, which is why it is important to use a flour with high protein content (bread flour). 
- If the bread isn’t kneaded for long enough the gluten won’t have enough time to form and build up. In addition the yeast may not be fully activated. 
- If the dough is left to prove for too long the yeast can die (over-fermentation). Its important to only prove for an hour in the first prove and then just 30 minute in the second prove. If you want to do the first prove over night you can do this if you place the dough in the fridge. The cold slows down the fermentation process.
- Too much salt can kill the yeast so stopping the formation and trapping of CO2.

Can you freeze bread rolls?

Yes once baked and fully cooled you can freeze bread rolls. However, bread rolls are far better fresh out of the oven. Defrosted bread can have a slight stale texture to it. To freeze place rolls in a container or food bag and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost remove from the freezer and leave on the side for an hour. Alternatively use the bread defrost function on a microwave.

🥗 How to serve

These easy bread rolls are the perfect accompaniment to a fresh bowl of soup or stew. Or for something different why not use them for mini picnic sandwiches or create mini burgers (sliders). I also love to have barbecued pulled beef brisket piled high on a roll and finished off with a dollop of homemade coleslaw - perfection!

🥐 Other types of bread

For a sweeter kind of bread try:

This bread roll recipe and its principles can also apply to any type of savoury bread, including rolls, loaves or any other shape of bread. Just shape the dough as you please once its ready. I also like to add extra ingredients to my bread to give it a more interesting flavour. A couple of teaspoons of herbs, spices, nuts etc can be added to the flour at the start of the recipe. My favourites are:

  • Focaccia bread (rosemary)
  • Tiger bread (cheese) 
  • Olive bread
  • Walnut bread
  • Pita bread (onion seed)
  • Artisan bread
  • Wholemeal roti bread

If you enjoy making your own bread why not try making your own homemade fresh pasta.

Let me know what you think of this recipe by leaving a comment and star rating below. You can also pin the recipe on pinterest.

 2hr45m to produce recipeUnder 200 calories recipevegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

homemade bread rolls
Print

Easy Bread Rolls Recipe

Easy bread rolls recipe! Made from scratch with store cupboard ingredients, these tasty, bake at home bread rolls are perfect for serving up at a dinner party or alongside your soup. Made in a traditional yet simple way theres no bread machine or dough hook here; just simple bread-making, from scratch, using your hands.
Course lunch, side, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 2 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 45 minutes
Servings 8 rolls
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 150 ml (⅔ cup) warm semi-skimmed (2%) milk
  • 1 tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Caster sugar
  • 225 g (1 ½ cups) Strong white bread flour
  • 1 teaspoon Crushed sea salt
  • 10 g Fresh yeast or 7g (2 ¼ tsp) sachet of dried yeast
  • Extra oil for oiling work surface and bowl do not use flour
  • 1 egg and a splash of milk for glazing
  • Poppy seeds or sesame seeds to decorate optional

Instructions

  • First, gently warm 150ml of semi-skimmed (2%) milk to body temperature (37°C), either on the stove or in the microwave. Test temperature with your finger. If it feels too hot allow to cool before using.
  • Next add 1 tablespoon olive oil and 1 teaspoon caster sugar to the milk. Then add the yeast and stir gently to dissolve. Leave for a couple of minutes to allow the yeast to activate. TIP: if using fresh yeast gently rub it between your fingers, once its in the milk, in order to fully dissolve.
  • Next sieve the flour and salt together into a large mixing bowl. Mix well using tips of fingers or a whisk.
  • Next add the milk and yeast mixture to the flour a little at a time (add ¾ initially) and mix using finger tips or a wooden spoon. Add enough liquid until it starts to come together and forms a nice sticky dough. Be careful not to squeeze the dough with your hand as it starts to come together. Ensure you incorporate all flour from bottom and sides. Gradually add remaining milk making sure all the yeast has been added. Use luke warm water if more liquid is required (better to be too wet than too dry).
  • Drizzle a bit of oil on a clean work surface to prevent the dough from sticking. Turn the dough out onto the oiled work surface and knead for 10 minutes by hand until smooth and elastic. TIP: test if the dough is ready by rolling into a ball then press into the centre with your finger. The dough should give an exaggerated bounce back.
  • The 1st prove: Place the dough in a lightly oiled bowl and cover with cling film and leave in a warm place to double in bulk, this will take approx. 1 hour.
  • After an hour remove the cling film and hit dough firmly with your hand to knock back. This will release the built up CO2. Turn out onto the work surface and use finger tips to flatten then roll into an even sausage shape. Use a large knife to halve, halve again and halve again into 8 even pieces. TIP: If you want to be really even with your rolls you can weigh each piece to check they are the same size.
  • To create the roll shape place the first piece of dough on the work surface and then place the flat of your hand on top. Make a circular motion and gradually move in your thumb and allow knuckles to rise, creating a smooth sphere. Make sure you press quite firmly in order to remove creases. Repeat with each piece of dough.
  • The 2nd prove: Place the rolls onto a lined or greased baking tray. Brush rolls with egg wash (1 egg whisked with a bit of milk) and sprinkle with sesame seeds or poppy seeds if desired. Cover tray with lightly oiled cling film. Leave them in a warm place until they appear well risen (30 mins).
  • Pre heat the oven to 180°C (FAN) (350°F) whilst waiting for the second prove.
  • After 30 minutes you should see a rise to the bread rolls. Add a tiny pinch of sea salt to the top of each roll then bake for 25 minutes - check at 15 minutes. Bake until the bread sounds hollow when tapped on the bottom. TIP: Spraying the oven with water at regular intervals can help create a better crust.
  • Cool on a rack before devouring. And don't forget to enjoy that freshly baked bread smell 🙂

Notes

Recipe tips:

Fully dissolve the yeast: Fresh yeast can sink to the bottom of the liquid and not fully dissolve. Check this by mixing with your finger tips - tracing the bottom of the milk vessel ensuring no clumps of yeast are stuck at the bottom.
Mix the salt into the flour rather than the milk: Salt will add flavour to the rolls but can kill the yeast, so best to mix and disperse this in the flour before the milk is added.
Use oil not flour on your work surface: When kneading the dough use oil on the work surface to stop it sticking. Don’t use flour as this will dry out the dough and a sticky dough is preferable when bread making.
Even bread rolls: To create evenly sized bread rolls you can weigh each piece of dough once you have halved into 8 pieces. However, rolling the dough into a sausage and then halving 3 times is usually pretty accurate.
Crusty bread rolls: To create a better crust on your rolls you can spray the inside of the oven with water a regular intervals during baking. Or place a roasting tin at the bottom of the oven and fill with water at the start of baking.

Frequently asked questions:

Why does the milk need to be warm? The warm milk allows the yeast to activate. However, if its too hot (more than body temperature) it will kill the yeast.
Why is there sugar in this recipe? Sugar added to the milk will feed the yeast and help it to activate properly. Yeast needs food, warmth and moisture to activate. The sugar is the food and the milk is the warmth and moisture.
Why do we knead dough? Kneading is one of most important stages in bread making and provides the opportunity for the two proteins found in flour to come together and form gluten. It also allows the yeast to work its magic and release carbon dioxide (CO2). Use power from your shoulder to knead thoroughly, the dough will go slightly whiter as you knead. Stretch out to see if snaps or stretches, continue kneading until the dough becomes nice and stretchy.
How long should I knead the dough? Dough should be kneaded for at least 10 minutes. You will know when the dough has been kneaded enough when it becomes stretchy and elastic. The best test is to roll the dough into a ball and then press firmly into the centre with your finger. The dough should bounce back.
Why does bread need to be proved twice? Allowing the dough to prove just means to rest it and give it the opportunity to rise. Over proofing can produce unstructured or uneven bread. So the 1st prove should only be for around 1 hour. Knocking back (hitting the risen dough with your hand) removes the air meaning the dough can be handled again and shaped. A second prove allows the shaped dough to rise again, this usually requires less time (around 30 minutes). 
When is the bread ready? To test if the rolls are cooked through, carefully turn over and tap on the bottom. The roll should sounds hollow.
Why is my bread heavy? The main cause of heavy or dense bread is a lack of rise. Bread can have a reduced rise for a number of reasons including not enough protein, not kneaded for long enough, left to prove for too long, too much salt.
  • Not enough protein in the bread would mean less gluten and so not as much CO2 can be trapped. The protein content comes from the flour, which is why it is important to use a flour with high protein content (bread flour).
  • If the bread isn’t kneaded for long enough the gluten won’t have enough time to form and build up. In addition the yeast may not be fully activated.
  • If the dough is left to prove for too long the yeast can die (over-fermentation). Its important to only prove for an hour in the first prove and then just 30 minute in the second prove. If you want to do the first prove over night you can do this if you place the dough in the fridge. The cold slows down the fermentation process.
  • Too much salt can kill the yeast so stopping the formation and trapping of CO2.
Can you freeze bread rolls? Yes once baked and fully cooled you can freeze bread rolls. However, bread rolls are far better fresh out of the oven. Defrosted bread can have a slight stale texture to it. To freeze place rolls in a container or food bag and freeze for up to 3 months. To defrost remove from the freezer and leave on the side for an hour. Alternatively use the bread defrost function on a microwave.
bread rolls nutritional info

Nutrition

Serving: 51g | Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 4.2g | Fat: 2.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1.3g | Sodium: 320mg | Potassium: 96.8mg | Fiber: 0.9g | Sugar: 1.8g | Vitamin A: 3.8IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 67mg | Iron: 0.8mg

The post Easy Bread Rolls Recipe appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/easy-mini-bread-rolls/feed/ 2
Cucumber Canapes with Prawns https://properfoodie.com/cucumber-canapes-with-prawns/ https://properfoodie.com/cucumber-canapes-with-prawns/#respond Fri, 04 Oct 2019 12:24:07 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10808 Create a classic easy finger food by making these cucumber canapes with prawns! These fancy appetisers are easy to prepare with a refreshing tzatziki filling, flavourful prawns and vibrant herb topping. Serve these for a party and your guests will be asking you for the recipe. These delicious cucumber appetizers are an easy pre dinner...

Read More

The post Cucumber Canapes with Prawns appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Create a classic easy finger food by making these cucumber canapes with prawns! These fancy appetisers are easy to prepare with a refreshing tzatziki filling, flavourful prawns and vibrant herb topping. Serve these for a party and your guests will be asking you for the recipe.

cucumber and prawns

These delicious cucumber appetizers are an easy pre dinner canape. They can be made ahead time to keep your guests happy, while you get on with the rest of the cooking.  Prawn appetizers like this are a clasic party food and make a delicious starter for an elegant dinner too.

I find cold appetizers are always the easiest to serve up, when you have other foods to prepare in the kitchen. You know they are ready to go in advance and theres no need to mess about heating them up when people start to arrive. Simply set them out on the table (perhaps with a pitcher of Rose Sangria) for your guests to enjoy. What could be easier?

What are canapes?

Typically, a canape is an appetizer or hors d’oeuvre consisting of a topping (usually savoury) on a small piece of bread, a pastry, or a cracker. In the case of cucumber canapes, the cucumber itself acts as the vessel for the topping⁠—perfect for low carb appetizers. Plus, these are cold appetizers, meaning you don’t have to stress about preparing them once your guests arrive. Just set them out to enjoy!

Canapes are an attractive and convenient way to allow guest to keep their appetite in check before a main meal. They're perfect for bringing your guests together in one location and keeping them happy whilst you prepare the main course and table setting elsewhere.

Prawn starters are quite a popular option as they can be served hot or cold and aren't overly filling. For an easy to make hot prawn starter try these honey glazed griddle prawns. For some inspiration for serving prawns in a main meal have a look at my salmon and prawn linguine, Chinese prawns recipe or easy pad Thai noodles.

cucumber and prawn cups

What do I need to make cucumber canapes?

Cucumber canapes require very few ingredients to make. This cucumber and prawn appetizer uses common ingredients and comes together in no time! To make prawns or shrimp in cucumber cups you will need:

  • 125g of prawns or shrimp (raw or cooked)
  • ½ tablespoon oil for cooking prawns
  • Salt and pepper
  • 2 whole cucumbers
  • 125g of Greek style, full fat yogurt
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic granules
  • Handful of finely chopped mint leaves
  • Variety of extra herbs for toppings (I used dill, mint and chives)

cucumber shrimp canapes

How to make cucumber canapes with prawns

  1. If using pre cooked prawns or shrimp go straight to step 3. Before making this cold appetizer recipe you will need to cook and chill the raw prawns. Place a pan on a medium heat and add half a tablespoon of oil. When the oil is hot place the prawns in the pan. Season with salt and pepper and cook the prawns for 1 minute on each side until bright pink.
  2. Remove from the pan and leave to cool. When completely cool chill in the fridge for at least 20 minutescooking shrimp
  3. Use a vegetable peeler to roughly peel the cucumbers. This doesn’t have to be perfect, a few strips of green skin left behind can add a nice effect to the finished prawn starter.roughly peel the cucumber
  4. Slice off and discard either end of the cucumbers then cut up into inch thick pieces. Each piece will become a cucumber canape cup.
  5. Use a melon baller to hollow out the seeds from the centre of each cucumber cup. You may also need to use a knife if you can’t get deep enough with the melon baller. Be careful not to go all the way through to the other side.use a melon baller and knife to hollow out the cucumber
  6. In a small bowl mix together the yogurt, lemon juice, garlic granules and finely chopped mint leaves to make a tzatziki filling. Season with salt pepper and mix in well. Taste and adjust as necessary.mix together yogurt, lemon juice, garlic granules and mint
  7. Transfer the tzatziki filling to a piping bag or a pouring jug. Line up the cucumber cups and carefully fill each cup with the tzatziki. Don’t fill all the way to the top, but leave a small gap, as the level of the filling will rise when the prawns and herbs are addedfill cucumber cups with yogurt sauce
  8. Place a chilled prawn over the lip of each cup with the head end in the filling and the tail end hanging outside of the cupplace the prawns over the lip of the cups
  9. Top with herbs and then servedecorate with herbs

TIP: These gourmet appetizers can be made a few hours ahead of time and stored in the fridge until needed. To ensure they keep at their best, leave off the herb toppings and add these just before serving. In addition, place kitchen paper under the finished prawn appetizers before placing in the fridge. The cut cucumber will release water as the canapes chill and the kitchen paper will prevent the cold hors d’oeuvres from becoming soggy.

cucumber canapes with tzatziki

What should I serve cucumber canapes with?

Dips and chips are another great option for keeping people happy and well fed, pre or post meal. I love to make my own beetroot hummus or a simple guacamole recipe. Hot canapes can also be just as easy, just make sure you leave enough time for that final heat up stage. Why not try delicious shrimp shumai, Chinese prawns recipe, or easy baked crispy potato wedges.

📖 Recipe

cucumber shrimp canapes
Print

Cucumber canapés with prawns

Create a classic easy finger food by making these cucumber canapes with prawns! these fancy appetisers are easy to prepare with a refreshing tzatziki filling, flavourful prawns and vibrant herb topping. Serve these for a party and your guests will be asking you for the recipe.Create a classic easy finger food by making these cucumber canapes with prawns! these fancy appetisers are easy to prepare with a refreshing tzatziki filling, flavourful prawns and vibrant herb topping. Serve these for a party and your guests will be asking you for the recipe.
Course Appetizer, party food, Snack, starter
Cuisine French
Prep Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 12 Canapes
Calories 33.5kcal

Equipment

  • Vegetable peeler
  • Melon baller or pouring jug
  • Piping bag (optional)

Ingredients

  • 125 g of prawns or shrimp raw or cooked
  • ½ tablespoon oil for cooking prawns
  • Salt and pepper
  • 2 whole cucumbers
  • 125 g of Greek style, full fat yogurt
  • Juice of half a lemon
  • ¼ teaspoon garlic granules
  • Handful of finely chopped mint leaves
  • Variety of extra herbs for toppings I used dill, mint and chives

Instructions

  • If using pre cooked prawns go straight to step 3. Before making this cold appetizer recipe you will need to cook and chill the raw prawns. Place a pan on a medium heat and add half a tablespoon of oil. When the oil is hot place the prawns in the pan. Season with salt and pepper and cook the prawns for 1 minute on each side until bright pink.
    cooking shrimp
  • Remove from the pan and leave to cool. When completely cool chill in the fridge for at least 20 minutes
  • Use a vegetable peeler to roughly peel the cucumbers. This doesn't have to be perfect, a few strips of green skin left behind can add a nice effect to the finished prawns starter
    roughly peel the cucumber
  • Slice off and discard either end of the cucumbers then cut up into inch thick pieces. Each piece will become a cucumber canape cup.
  • Use a melon baller to hollow out the seeds from the centre of each cucumber cup. You may also need to use a knife if you can't get deep enough with the melon baller. Be careful not to go all the way through to the other side.
    use a melon baller and knife to hollow out the cucumber
  • In a small bowl mix together the yogurt, lemon juice, garlic granules and finely chopped mint leaves to make a tzatziki filling. Season with salt pepper and mix in well. Taste and adjust as necessary.
    mix together yogurt, lemon juice, garlic granules and mint
  • Transfer the tzatziki filling to a piping bag. Line up the cucumber cups and carefully fill each cup with the tzatziki. Don't fill all the way to the top, but leave a small gap, as the level of the filling will rise when the prawns and herbs are added
    fill cucumber cups with yogurt sauce
  • Place a chilled prawn over the lip of each cup with the head end in the filling and the tail end hanging outside of the cup
    place the prawns over the lip of the cups
  • Top with herbs and then serve
    decorate with herbs

Video

Notes

RECIPE TIP:

These gourmet appetizers can be made a few hours ahead of time and stored in the fridge until needed. To ensure they keep at their best, leave off the herb toppings and add these just before serving. In addition, place kitchen paper under the finished prawn appetizers before placing in the fridge. The cut cucumber will release water as the canapes chill and the kitchen paper will prevent the cold hors d'oeuvres from becoming soggy.

Nutrition

Serving: 66g | Calories: 33.5kcal | Carbohydrates: 1.2g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1.9g | Saturated Fat: 0.8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.6g | Sodium: 80mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g

PIN FOR LATER

Create a classic easy finger food by making these cucumber canapes with prawns! these fancy appetisers are easy to prepare with a refreshing tzatziki filling, flavourful prawns and vibrant herb topping. Serve these for a party and your guests will be asking you for the recipe.

I first shared this Cucumber canapes recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site, where I am a contributor.

The post Cucumber Canapes with Prawns appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/cucumber-canapes-with-prawns/feed/ 0
Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/ https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/#respond Mon, 11 Jan 2021 17:45:55 +0000 http://www.properfoodie.com/?p=7871 SLOE GIN HOT TODDY RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM. A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary. [feast_advanced_jump_to] 👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe Who has the time or inclination for figuring out complicated cocktails?? This easy sloe gin hot toddy recipe has just enough...

Read More

The post Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>

SLOE GIN HOT TODDY RECIPE. AD FEATURE FOR SILVER MUSHROOM.

A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary.

a purple and steaming, double walled glass of sloe gin hot toddy decorated with a sprig of rosemary and a second glass in the background.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

👩🏻‍🍳 Why make this recipe

Who has the time or inclination for figuring out complicated cocktails?? This easy sloe gin hot toddy recipe has just enough about it to make it interesting but theres not so much going on that you need a million ingredients. Its also a really easy to put together, so once you've made it, its probably a recipe that will stick - no need to keep looking up the method!!

However, if you are after a hot toddy that will help with a cough or a cold then you might be better trying this Honey and lemon tea.

🍽 Equipment notes

Useful bits of equipment for making this recipe:

🥘 Ingredients

To make this sloe gin hot toddy you will need:

A display of the ingredients needed to make the sloe gin hot toddy recipe with text overlay stating each ingredients

Ingredient notes

Sloe gin: As this is a hot beverage I find that sloe gin works best here. A bit like with hot Vimto, the flavour of berries is greatly enhanced when heated. However, if you would like a more traditional hot toddy you can replace the sloe gin with brandy or whiskey. If doing this I recommend removing the blackberries and rosemary and mixing with lemon juice and cinnamon instead.

Honey: Honey is essential for balancing out the flavour and is also a lovely addition to any hot drink for its soothing effects.

Blackberries: Blackberries are a great way to add to the natural berry flavour of the drink. You could also try with raspberries, blueberries, or blackcurrants. I do not recommend using sloe berries as they are far too tart to eat raw.

Rosemary: Purely for aromatic flavour.

🔪 Step by step instructions

  1. Place the blackberries in a small bowl. Add a splash of hot water and then use a fork to crush and mash up the berries.
  2. Push the berries through a sieve allowing the juice to fall into a clean jug. Use the back of a spoon to push through as much juice as you can. - Discard seeds.
  3. Add 2 teaspoon honey to the blackberry juice and mix well.
  4. Divide the sweetened blackberry juice between 2 tall mugs or double walled glasses and add a measure of sloe gin to each glass.A collage of 4 images showing how to sloe gin hot toddy step by step for instructions 1-4.
  5. Top up each glass with hot water and stir well until the honey fully dissolves. Taste and add more honey if desired.
  6. Decorate each glass with sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries (optional).A collage of 2 images showing how to make sloe gin hot toddy step by step for instructions 5 and 6

💭 Expert tips

  • For extra flavour add spices such as cinnamon, cloves and star anise.
  • To enhance the flavour of rosemary add a few rosemary leaves to the hot water and blackberries in step 1 of the recipe. Then leave to stand and infuse for a few minutes before removing the rosemary and crushing the blackberries with a fork.
  • Substitutions: If you can't get hold of any fresh blackberries you could replace with blackcurrants, strawberries, blueberries or a blackcurrant or blackberry cordial.

❓ Frequently asked questions

Can I use other types of gin in this recipe?

You can of course opt for other flavours of gin if you prefer. Try to go for flavours that will pair well with blackberries.

Can I use brandy or whiskey in this hot toddy recipe?

If you are looking for a brandy of whiskey hot toddy then remove the rosemary and berries from this recipe and use lemon juice and cinnamon instead. Taste and add more honey if desired.

Two double wall tall glass filled with purple berry hot toddy and decorated with sprigs of rosemary.

☕ Other hot drink recipes

🍓 Other recipes that use berries

If you've tried this recipe, let me know what you think by leaving a star rating in the recipe card or comment section below. I always appreciate your feedback! You can also follow me on Pinterest, Facebook or Instagram or Sign up to my email list!

📖 Recipe

purple and steaming sloe gin hot toddy served in 2 double wall glasses, with sprigs of rosemary and on a bronze tray.
Print

Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries

A warming sloe gin hot toddy recipe flavoured with sweet blackberry juice, honey and aromatic sprigs of fresh rosemary.
Course aperitif, aperitivo, beverage, digestif
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 tall glasses
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 80 g Fresh Blackberries
  • Splash of Hot water
  • 2 teaspoon Honey
  • 2 measures of Sloe Gin
  • Hot water to top up
  • Sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries to serve optional

Instructions

  • Place the blackberries in a small bowl. Add a splash of hot water and then use a fork to crush and mash up the berries.
  • Push the berries through a sieve allowing the juice to fall into a clean jug. Use the back of a spoon to push through as much juice as you can. - Discard seeds.
  • Add 2 teaspoon honey to the blackberry juice and mix well.
  • Divide the sweetened blackberry juice between 2 tall mugs or double walled glasses and add a measure of sloe gin to each glass.
  • Top up each glass with hot water and stir well until the honey fully dissolves. Taste and add more honey if desired.
  • Decorate each glass with sprigs of rosemary and extra whole blackberries (optional).

Notes

Flavour: For extra flavour add spices such as cinnamon, cloves and star anise.
Rosemary: To enhance the flavour of rosemary add a few rosemary leaves to the hot water and blackberries in step 1 of the recipe. Then leave to stand and infuse for a few minutes before removing the rosemary and crushing the blackberries with a fork.
Substitutions: If you can't get hold of any fresh blackberries you could replace with blackcurrants, strawberries, blueberries or a blackcurrant or blackberry cordial.
Can I use other types of gin in this hot toddy recipe?
You can of course opt for other flavours of gin if you prefer. Try to go for flavours that will pair well with blackberries.
Can I use brandy or whiskey in this hot toddy recipe?
If you are looking for a brandy of whiskey hot toddy then remove the rosemary and berries from this recipe and use lemon juice and cinnamon instead. Taste and add more honey if desired.

Nutrition

Serving: 300ml | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 65mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg

This post was first published in November 2018. Updated in January 2021 with new images, step-by-step photos and recipe tips.

The post Sloe Gin Hot Toddy with Blackberries appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/blackberry-sloe-gin-hot-toddy/feed/ 0
Amarone Risotto https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/ https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/#comments Thu, 14 Sep 2017 08:03:04 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4762 Our Italian wedding breakfast: Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan cheese and chopped parsley Italian wedding planner: 'Dream Academy': Dream Academy Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona Before I get going with this gorgeously irresistible, wine-filled Amarone risotto I just wanted...

Read More

The post Amarone Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Our Italian wedding breakfast: Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan cheese and chopped parsley

Valpolicella red wine risotto

Italian wedding planner: 'Dream Academy': Dream Academy

Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona

Before I get going with this gorgeously irresistible, wine-filled Amarone risotto I just wanted to mention that: I GOT MARRIED!! 😆

The inspiration for this risotto comes from our Italian wedding breakfast and so I feel it is entirely appropriate to give you a little background wedding story in order to set the scene.

An Italian Wedding

On the 26th August 2017 I officially became Mrs Jones when I married my best friend and soul mate: Ben. Its a day neither of us will ever forget.

We were married on a small island in the middle of a picturesque lake, set in the Gardens of a Veronese Villa in Northern Italy. A location we picked and fell in love with well over a year ago.

groom and groomsmen waiting on te island villa bertani

I arrived as expected in a sleek white car, slightly late and as giddy as a little girl waiting for Santa on Christmas Eve.

Bride in the car

[- Me after a good 5 hours of hair and make-up prep, finished off with a good amount of wriggling and straining in order to get into my dress in the Italy heat.]

Arriving at the point in time that we had been planning for the last year and a half, was certainly nerve racking and very emotional. . . We were about to become husband and wife!

wedding at Villa Bertani Italy

I can't tell you how incredible the whole event was for both of us. A whirlwind day of one magical experience after another. Amazing musicians, perfect weather, immaculately dressed groomsmen, stunning bridesmaids, striking flowers . . . you get the idea.

bride and bridemaids and villa bertani

music at villa bertani

Basically, I loved every bit of our amazing Italian wedding and yes I may even brag a little and burst with pride at the whole darn thing. But if a bride can't be boastful and overjoyed on her wedding day, then when can she?

wedding in a vineyard

Italian wedding food

So, what about the food. Yes the food!! Other than actually getting married, the food was one of the most important parts for Ben and I. We love Italy and we love Italian food even more. So our Italian wedding day just had to erupt with the most amazing representation of all kinds of Italian foods imaginable. The canapés (and I say canapés but it was more like a feast fit for the 5000) were a stunning array of cheeses, meats, stews, flat breads, and so many more delicious things, which I would care to remember in more detail had I been allowed the appetite of my normal self. As it were, the emotions of the day were clearly too much for my startled stomach. However, just to look and see our guests enjoy each new found foodie delight was more than enough.

italian wedding canapes villa bertani

The sit down meal had been carefully selected by myself and Ben a few months earlier. We stuck to the traditional Italian meal structure of pasta course, risotto course, main course and dessert. Basically it was not really the time to be in a restrictive dress or to be feeling too excited to eat. . .

With the right posture and a steady pace I was able to do my usual trick and clear every last morsel.

This was one meal that I was not going to waste.

Amarone risotto

And now, back home in rainy Glossop, the distant sounds of the mandolin, the fading yellow light from the August sun, and the aroma of risotto rice gently stewing in a rich Amarone red wine are all I can think about. So, lets not waste any more time and lets get down to business: my version of the amazing, primo piatto (first course) Amarone Risotto dish that stole my stomach (my heart was already taken) on our Italian wedding day.

How to make Amarone Risotto

Amarone, the most highly regarded wine of the Valpolicella area in Northern Italy. Followed closely by the Valpolicella Ripasso and Valpollicella classico, the deep, sweet flavours of this type of wine, had us both at Hello. Not that we have a great knowledge of wines, but we have been lucky enough to participate in a few Italian wine tastings over the last few years. So we have a reasonable idea of what we do and don't like. (More on wine tasting to follow in another post shortly!)

Amarone wine risotto

In Italy the pairing of wine with food is essential, this is most clearly demonstrated in this wonderful dish where the wine is the main ingredient and star of the show. Using good quality wine in recipes is one of the most important things I have ever learnt about cooking. Scraping together a few extra pennies for the Amarone wine in this particular recipe is totally worth it. However, if the Amarone is a little out of your price range, the Ripasso or even Classico are considered excellent alternatives.

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine

Amarone risotto ingredients

This stunning and moreish plate of sweet Amarone risotto can be recreated with just a few basic ingredients. With a little patience and time taken over the addition of the wine and stock, a beautiful mound of food can be created. A mound of food that will no doubt be appearing regularly at our table from now on.

Amarone listed ingredients

Cooking the perfect risotto

Risotto is one of the first dishes I ever made as a young kitchen explorer. My first attempts were always very appealing to me, although probably slightly sloppy and overcooked. But over the years I have observed and practised the best techniques for cooking this delicious grain, and I'm always striving to spoon out the best silky, smooth, al dente risotto dish as is possible.

Amarone risotto

So first things first: BUTTER. Yes butter. No risotto is complete with out the rich starting point of a good helping of melted butter. The butter is also used to "awaken the rice". Coating the uncooked grains with the warmed butter helps to soften the grain and allow it to soak up liquids more easily. And the aim of this recipe: get the wine into the rice!!

amarone red wine risotto vertical

I used both stock and wine (more of the latter) as the liquid ingredients for this recipe. Adding the liquid a bit at a time and allowing the rice to absorb each addition before adding the next. Generally this is considered the best technique for producing perfectly cooked risotto rice. A quick simmer with the lid on, after the final addition, will ensure that the grains are cooked to just the right point and that they are sitting snugly in a rich, thick wine sauce.

Bellissimo!

Our wedding planner

Before I leave you to consider this luscious Amarone risotto for your next meal, I must mention and thank our wonderful Italian wedding planner: Marion Hunter. If you are yet to walk down the aisle and if you ever find yourself considering a wedding in Northern Italy I would highly recommend you check out Marion's services. We will never ever forget our magical day and will be forever grateful to Marion for her dedication and commitment to our wishes and dreams. Thank you Marion!

Find out more about Marion and her company 'Dream Academy' here: Dream Academy

Wedding venue: Villa Mosconi Bertani, Verona

Verona wedding

Find out what we got up to on our Italian Honeymoon at Torciano Winery, in San Gimignano and in Bologna.

Other risotto recipes you might like to try: Haddock and rosemary risotto, Mushroom risotto, leftover turkey risotto.

📖 Recipe

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine
Print

Amarone Risotto

Little pearly grains of soft risotto rice gently stewed in butter and Amarone red wine, topped with freshly grated parmesan and chopped parsley
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 2 People
Calories 785kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large Onion 200g finely chopped
  • 2 cloves Garlic finely chopped
  • 50 g Butter
  • 250 ml of veg stock or beef stock if not sticking to a veggie recipe
  • 400 ml of Valpolicella Amarone red wine Can be replaced with Ripasso or Valpolicella Classico
  • 200 g Arborio risotto rice
  • 25 g freshly grated parmesan
  • 10 g fresh parsley roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Place a large shallow pan on a medium heat and add the butter. Once the butter has melted add the chopped onion and garlic then gently fry for a couple of minutes. As the onions begin to sweat down add the rice and mix well to allow each grain to be coated with the butter. Coating the uncooked grains with the warmed butter helps to soften the grain and allow it to soak up liquids more easily. And the aim of this recipe: get the wine into the rice!!
  • Next, with the pan still on a medium heat, add around ⅕ of the stock and ⅕ of the wine. stir and allow to simmer for a few minutes.
  • The liquid will quickly be absorbed by the rice, at this point add another helping (⅕) of stock and wine. Continue until all the liquid has been added, ensuring each addition is absorbed before the next is added.This usually takes around 20 minutes. After pouring in the last addition, place a lid on the pan and simmer for 5 minutes.
  • Taste your risotto and check the rice is cooked before mixing in half of the parmesan. Then taste and season if necessary.
  • Finally serve the risotto and top with the remaining parmesan and the parsley.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 572g | Calories: 785kcal | Carbohydrates: 94.6g | Protein: 13.4g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 15.6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6.4g | Fiber: 3.6g

Arborio rice gently stewed in butter and amarone red wine

The post Amarone Risotto appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/amarone-risotto/feed/ 16
Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/ https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/#comments Sun, 24 Dec 2017 13:12:58 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5603 Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year. Christmas dinner sides Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my...

Read More

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Delicious honey glazed carrots and parsnips with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.

honey glazed carrots and parsnips

Christmas dinner sides

Its Christmas Eve!! And theres just enough time for me to pop up one more recipe before I start on my own Christmas prep for tomorrow. Getting organised with all the side dishes is a great way to be able to concentrate on the star of the show on the actual day. Not only are these honey glazed carrots and parsnips super tasty and really pretty but they also really easy to make and can be prepared ahead of the big day.

Christmas carrots and parsnips honey roast root vegetables

Honey glazed carrots and parsnips

So along with my gorgonzola sprouts and a delicious Tia Maria Tiramisu dessert I'm also going to be preparing some honey glazed carrots and parnsips a day in advance. I love little baby carrots with a little tuft of green left on the end, however, standard carrots sliced into skinny batons will work just as well for this recipe.

garlic and thyme honey roast carrots and parsnips

Preparing root vegetables in advance

And this recipe really couldn't be any simpler - and it really will take away any hassle on the day and save on extra pots and pans to wash. The baby carrots need no special prep, they can go straight on tray along with a few sprigs of thyme and a couple of crushed garlic cloves. I used standard parsnips to go along with my carrots, which I roughly chopped into similar shapes and sizes as the baby carrots.

garlic and thyme carrots and parsnips

Once all the veggies are lined up - drizzle over a table spoon of honey, a table spoon of oil, a sprinkle of salt and pepper and then add a few dots of proper butter. Pop the whole lot into the oven and roast for 20 minutes. Easy!! Once cooked these can be transferred to a sealable container and refrigerated for up to 2 days.

honey roast carrots and parsnips prepared in advance

On the big day place your honey glazed carrots and parsnips back on a baking tray and reheat in the oven for 5 minutes - done and dusted 🙂 For more great Christmas Day prep ideas, check out my homemade cauliflower cheese, homemade Cranberry sauce and Honey glazed prawns starter. Or if you don't feel the need to roast a whole turkey try out my simple roast chicken recipe. And once Christmas is all over with don't forget to make good use of that leftover turkey with a Turkey sunshine risotto or Mulligatawny soup.

If you also happen to be stuck for ideas for your Christmas shopping, then check out my Christmas gifts for foodies - jam packed full of present ideas for the food lovers in your life.

Other Christmas recipe ideas

📖 Recipe

christmas carrots and parsnips
Print

Christmas honey roast root vegetables with Garlic and Thyme

Deliciously glazed honey roast root vegetables with crushed garlic cloves and fresh thyme. This dish of little carrots and parsnips will be a real crowd-pleaser on your Christmas table this year.
Course Christmas, Side Dish
Cuisine British
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 2 People

Ingredients

  • 150 g baby carrots
  • 200 g parsnips
  • 3 whole crushed garlic cloves
  • A few sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • tablespoon of runny honey
  • 10 g butter
  • Salt and pepper

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees.
  • The baby carrots need no prep - place these straight onto a large baking tray. If you are using standard carrots then peel, remove the ends and chop into skinny batons. Place onto the tray.
  • To prepare the parsnips wash them thoroughly then remove the ends and chop into a similar size and shape as the carrots. Spread the parsnips evenly amongst the carrots.
  • Next peel 3 garlic cloves and gently crush each one by placing the flat side off the knife over the top of the clove and gently pushing on top with the palm of your hand. Add the cloves to the tray along with the sprigs of fresh thyme.
  • Drizzle the whole lot with olive oil and honey then roughly chop the butter into small cubes and dot around the tray. Finish with a pinch of salt and pepper.
  • Place the tray in the centre of the oven and roast for 20 minutes.
  • Once cooked remove from the oven and serve. If you are preparing in advance then allow the veggies to cool before transferring to a sealable container, then refrigerate for up to 2 days.
  • To reheat place the vegetables back onto a tray and bake in a 180 degree oven for 5 minutes.

PIN FOR LATER

Honey glazed carrots and parsnip root vegetables with garlic and thyme

The post Christmas honey glazed carrots and parsnips with Garlic and Thyme appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/honey-glazed-carrots-parsnips/feed/ 2
Foil Pack Potatoes https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/ https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/#respond Wed, 19 Jun 2019 21:18:01 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=10145 Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe! Foil pack potatoes The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them....

Read More

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Foil pack potatoes cooked on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes

The smell of these little potatoes will hit you way before you've even caught a glimpse of them. Theres no holding back the aroma of dried rosemary slowly baking away whilst nestled in foil with garlic and butter. Once the foil is unwrapped its usually a matter of second before they're all gone.

Roasting or grilling potatoes and veggies really brings out the best flavour and there are so many fantastic ways of doing this. My favourite is is oven baked cauliflower cheese with a creamy homemade cheese sauce. For something a little less fattening; Honey glazed carrots and parsnips cooked on a tray in the oven until perfectly caramelised by the heat, perfect for Sunday dinner or even Christmas day. Or how about roasted Cauliflower salad, which is very popular at the minute. This roasted cauliflower salad is a great dish for serving up at a party or to make your working lunch a little more interesting.

garlic and rosemary roast potatoes

Ingredients for foil pack potatoes

  • Baby potatoes
  • Olive oil
  • Dried rosemary
  • Fresh thyme
  • Whole garlic cloves
  • Sea salt
  • Butter
  • Fresh parsley

How to cook Potatoes in Foil Packets

  1. Pre heat barbecue grill to medium or oven to 200 degrees C. Chop potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  2. Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil and on top place 3 sprigs of thyme and 15g of cubed of butter.transfer to foil
  3. Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap.wrap and close foil
  4. Barbecue or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in more butter and seasoning then return to the grill or oven with the foil open.after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  5. Cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown then top with parsley and enjoy.bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Can I cook foil packets in the oven?

Yes foil packets are perfect for oven cooking. Theres no need to prepare anything differently just place the foil pack on a tray before inserting into the oven.

roast garlic butter potatoes

Foil pack potatoes are the perfect side dish to your meat and 2 veg and so will go well with almost any meal. If you do have the Barbecue out then definitely pair this recipe up with a grilled porterhouse steak or how about grilled lamb chops with mustard, rosemary and garlic.

potatoes on the barbecue

These potatoes are also great with a lighter salad option or even just on their own. So next time you're having a barbecue make sure you get a pack of these on the grill!

Other potato recipes ideas

 1 hour to produceunder 500 kcal recipehigh in nutrients recipe

📖 Recipe

foil pack potatoes
Print

Foil pack potatoes

Foil pack potatoes grilled on the barbecue or roasted in the oven with a buttery, herb and garlic dressing. Crack open these mouthwatering potatoes at your next gathering and everyone will want the recipe!
Course Appetizer, party food, Side Dish, Snack, starter, sunday dinner
Cuisine American, British
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 people
Calories 196.8kcal

Ingredients

  • 660 g Baby potatoes chopped into bite size pieces
  • ½ tablespoon Olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Dried rosemary
  • 3 Sprigs fresh thyme
  • 7 Whole garlic cloves no need to peel
  • Pinch of Sea salt and pepper
  • 30 g Butter
  • 20 g Fresh parsley

Instructions

  • Pre heat the barbecue to medium or oven to 200 degrees Chop the potatoes into bite sized pieces then place in a bowl and mix with oil, seasoning, whole garlic cloves and dried rosemary.
    mix well to fully coat the potatoes
  • Transfer the potatoes to a piece of foil, around 70cm in length. Bunch the potatoes in the middle of the foil. Place 3 sprigs of thyme and half (15of cubed of butter on top of the potatoes.
    transfer to foil
  • Bring the edges of the foil together and wrap, ensuring a tight seal all around. If the width of the foil isn’t long enough to wrap properly then double wrap with second piece of foil in the opposite direction.
    wrap and close foil
  • Place the foil directly onto the barbecue grill or if roasting place on a tray before inserting into the oven.
  • Grill or roast for 40 minutes then remove from the grill or oven and open up the foil. Remove the thyme and add in the rest of the butter and season again. Then return to the grill or oven with the foil open and cook for a further 15 minutes or until golden brown.
    after 40 minutes unwrap and remove thyme, add more seasoning and butter
  • Top with parsley and enjoy!
    bake open for a further 15 minutes the top with parsley

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 186g | Calories: 196.8kcal | Carbohydrates: 28.7g | Protein: 3.4g | Fat: 8.4g | Saturated Fat: 4.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2.8g | Sodium: 160mg | Sugar: 2.4g

I first shared this Foil pack potatoes recipe on the Sunday Supper Movement site where I am a contributor.

foil pack potatoes baked in the oven with garlic cloves and served with butter and parsley

The post Foil Pack Potatoes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/foil-pack-potatoes/feed/ 0
Stuffed peppers with couscous https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/#comments Mon, 04 Jun 2018 23:01:05 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=6829 FEATURED AD FOR THE ENGLISH PROVENDER CO. Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney Stuffed peppers recipe This definitely has to be classed as a summertime recipe for me, sunny days when the BBQ comes out...

Read More

The post Stuffed peppers with couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
FEATURED AD FOR THE ENGLISH PROVENDER CO. Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney

stuffed roasted pepper with couscous cheese sauce

Stuffed peppers recipe

This definitely has to be classed as a summertime recipe for me, sunny days when the BBQ comes out and its all about alfresco dining with friends!

When the sun starts to shine I cant help but start planning some great summer feast ideas. Starting off with these slightly charred, vegetarian stuffed peppers, packed full of creamy, couscous in cheese sauce - with a lovely dollop of sweet, tangy tomato chutney on the top. - Yes the cheese sauce, and couscous, and chutney did go all over my face, but its so worth it! (scroll to the end of this post to read about how I make my perfect cheese sauce).

I do love a good cheese sauce and I have a few other lovely meals that work so well with this silky smooth sauce. Obviously, the go-to cheese sauce recipe has to be leeks in cheese sauce with your Sunday roast. But its also a really great way to jazz up your sprouts at Christmas, and I also love a creamy cheese sauce in my fish pie - mmmm.

Stuffed peppers ingredients

To make this stuffed peppers with couscous recipe you will need a few simple ingredients:

  • Bell peppers
  • Giant couscous
  • Butter
  • Flour
  • Semi-skimmed milk
  • Cheddar cheese
  • paprika
  • cayenne pepper
  • Chutney
  • salt and pepper
  • Salad leaves

baked cheese sauce stuffed peppers and couscous

How to make stuffed peppers with cous cous

The basis of this stuffed pepper recipe is a simple cheese sauce

  1. Cut a lid out of the top of each pepper and use a spoon to remove the seeds and hollow out the insides.
  2. Cook the couscous in simmering water with the lid on for 15 minutes.
  3. Drain and set the couscous to one side
  4. Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees
  5. Make the cheese sauce (tips at the bottom of this post and full recipe instructions below).
  6. In a bowl mix together the cooked couscous and cheese sauce
  7. Spoon the couscous in cheese sauce into the peppers, replace the lids and place on a baking tray.
  8. Place the stuffed peppers in the oven and bake for 30 minutes or until slightly charred

What to serve with stuffed peppers?

This stuffed pepper recipe is packed with couscous and oozing with cheese sauce, although they are a great vegetarian option they are kind of on the heavy, indulgent side so a great accompaniment would be something light or even a salad.  My mango and avocado salad would be a good choice.

On the other hand if you were to substitute the couscous and cheese sauce and make stuffed peppers with rice then the dish would become a great side itself to chicken or beef or practically anything that gets thrown on the BBQ.  These BBQ skewers pair up rather nicely or check out my chicken, proscuitto and blackberry salad for a healthy option.

The English Provender company very kindly provided me with some of their delicious tomato chutney for this recipe - and it really paired up fantastically well with the Mediterranean flavours and velvety cheese sauce.  Why not add a dollop and make this a stand alone meal of its own.

couscous and cheese sauce in bell pepper

Low carb stuffed peppers

For a low carb alternative to this recipe the couscous could be replaced with a mince filling (mince turkey, mince chicken, mince beef) or for a slightly healthier option why not try quinoa stuffed peppers or even quorn stuffed peppers.

Can you freeze stuffed peppers before cooking?

Provided you have cooked the main elements of the dish already like the couscous or any meats you may have included, then it is OK to freeze your stuffed peppers.  Allow the stuffed peppers to cool after any cooking has taken place and place them into an appropriate container.  You can also use food bags to portion up your stuffed peppers as you please.  You can cook your stuffed peppers from frozen, if you wish to do this, cook them in the oven for an extra 15 minutes on top of the 30 minutes described in the recipe and make sure they are piping hot throughout before serving.

cheesy pepper and couscous with tomato chutney 2

How long will stuffed peppers last in the fridge?

If wrapped in cling film or sealed in a seal-able container you can store your stuffed peppers for up to 5 days without problem, i would recommend you consume them cooked fresh or freeze what you don't need to cook from scratch at a later date.

Can you reheat stuffed peppers?

These peppers are definitely best roasted in the oven from fresh or from frozen as the delicate bell peppers can become a little soft if microwaved.  Also depending on your fillings you should follow these basic rules:

  • Always refrigerate leftovers and aim to consume ideally within 3 days
  • never freeze food more than once
  • always completely defrost food before cooking
  • always make sure food is piping hot throughout before serving

couscous in cheese sauce stuffed peppers

Homemade cheese sauce

I absolutely adore cheese sauce, and it works so well in this dish. Cheese sauce can get a bad rep as being hard to make. But once you've made it, or at least made it wrong a few times and ended up manically trying to sieve out the lumps, then you eventually get the hang of it and realise it ain't so hard :-).

How to make the perfect cheese sauce

The first rule of cheese sauce making is to have equal amounts of butter and flour. Usually around 20-30g of each, but this depends on how much sauce you are making. Melt the butter in a small pan and then add the flour to form a paste.

The second rule is to remember that you want to try and keep your sauce thick and allow the milk to be absorbed into the paste. So next step, keep the pan on a low to medium heat and gradually begin to add the milk to the paste (around 1 pint of milk can be added to 30g butter and 30g flour). Stir quickly between each addition of milk, remembering to run the spoon all around the edges and base of the pan. As each addition of milk thickens, add a little more until all the milk has been added. At this point, you will have successfully made a white sauce.

The final rule is to make sure the flour has been fully cooked out (otherwise the sauce will have a slight floury taste). To cook out the flour, keep the white sauce on the heat and continue to stir until it just starts to boil. At this point the pan can be taken off the heat and the grated cheese can be stirred in to turn the white sauce to a cheese sauce. Then get adding it to your leeks, peppers, sprouts, fish pies or whatever else takes your fancy 🙂

 1 hour to make recipeunder 500 calories recipe1 of 5 a dayvegetarian recipe

📖 Recipe

couscous in cheese sauce stuffed peppers
Print

Stuffed peppers with couscous

Roasted stuffed peppers bursting at the seams with giant pearls of couscous in a creamy cheese sauce and topped with a sweet tomato and chilli chutney
Course Dinner, Main Course, starter
Cuisine American, Moroccan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
0 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 People
Calories 319kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 medium sized bell peppers tops cut off and peppers hollowed out (save the lids for decoration if you wish)

For the couscous in cheese sauce

  • 200 g dried giant Israeli couscous (I used Merchant Gourmet Giant Couscous)
  • 400 ml boiling water
  • 30 g butter
  • 30 g flour
  • pint 350ml semi skimmed milk
  • 75 g cheddar grated
  • Pinch of sea salt and pepper
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • Tomato chutney I used English Provender Tomato Chutney
  • Extra grated cheese for topping

To serve

  • Rocket or salad leaves

Instructions

To prepare the peppers

  • Cut a lid out of the top of each pepper around the main stem (use the stem to lift your lid off). Use a spoon to hollow out the peppers and fully remove all the seeds and pith. Set to one side ready to stuff later.

To prepare the couscous

  • Place a small pan on medium heat and add the couscous and boiling water. Bring to the boil then simmer with the lid on for 15 minutes - or for length of time stated on the packet. Keep an eye on this and top up the water if required. Once cooked, drain and set the couscous to one side.
  • Pre heat the oven to 180 degrees

To make the cheese sauce.

  • Melt the butter in a small pan and then add the flour to form a paste. Keep the pan on a low to medium heat and gradually begin to add the milk to the paste. Stir quickly between each addition of milk, remembering to run the spoon all around the edges and base of the pan. As each addition of milk thickens, add a little more until all the milk has been added. At this point, you will have successfully made a white sauce. Make sure the flour is fully cooked out of the sauce by continuing to heat and stir until it just starts to boil. At this point the pan can be taken off the heat and the grated cheese can be stirred in to turn the white sauce to a cheese sauce. Make sure the cheese has fully melted (briefly return to the heat if needed) then season wth salt and pepper and stir in the paprika and cayenne pepper.

Stuffing the peppers

  • Add the Cooked giant couscous to the cheese sauce and mix together well.
  • Next place your hollowed out peppers on a baking tray. Carefully spoon the couscous in cheese sauce into each of the peppers until full. Sprinkle a little extra grated cheese on the top of each pepper and then carefully and a teaspoon of tomato chutney on top of the cheese.
  • Place the stuffed peppers into the centre of the pre heated oven and roast for 30 minutes or until slightly charred on the outside.
  • Remove from the oven and add a little more chutney if desired then serve with rocket or salad leaves…..and the rest of your summer feast!!

Nutrition

Serving: 345g | Calories: 319kcal | Carbohydrates: 41.5g | Protein: 12.7g | Fat: 12.8g | Saturated Fat: 7.5g | Sodium: 360mg | Sugar: 11.7g

PIN FOR LATER

stuffed bell peppers with couscous in cheese sauce

The post Stuffed peppers with couscous appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/stuffed-peppers-couscous-cheese-sauce/feed/ 4
5 minute Satay Sauce https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/ https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/#respond Sun, 20 Mar 2016 12:43:18 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=1876 This satay sauce literally takes 5 minutes and is a great way to liven up your meal, particularly a chicken dish. Whats not to love with that delicious tahini and peanut butter going on. Its even freezer friendly, so get a few batches made and frozen, ready for those last minute dinner parties or BBQs....

Read More

The post 5 minute Satay Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
This satay sauce literally takes 5 minutes and is a great way to liven up your meal, particularly a chicken dish.

Chicken satay sauce
Chicken satay sauce

Whats not to love with that delicious tahini and peanut butter going on.

Its even freezer friendly, so get a few batches made and frozen, ready for those last minute dinner parties or BBQs.

For a couple of ideas of how to use this great sauce check out my satay skewers and chicken satay platter with quinoa salad

How to make satay sauce

📖 Recipe

Chicken satay sauce
Print

5 minute Satay Sauce

Chicken satay sauce
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon crunchy peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoon brown tahini sauce
  • 1 green chilli deseeded and roughly chopped
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and roughly chopped
  • 2 cm piece of fresh ginger peeled and roughly chopped
  • 15 g fresh coriander roughly chopped
  • 10 g of fresh mint leaves roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon light soy sauce
  • Juice of 1 lime
  • 2 tablespoon cold water

Instructions

  • Place all the satay sauce ingredients into a food processor and blitz together. Gradually add small amounts of cold water until a smooth consistency is reached.

The post 5 minute Satay Sauce appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/5-minute-satay-sauce/feed/ 0
Smoked Salmon and Mackerel Fishcakes https://properfoodie.com/salmon-and-mackerel-fishcakes/ https://properfoodie.com/salmon-and-mackerel-fishcakes/#comments Sun, 11 Jun 2017 17:30:21 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=4202 Salmon and mackerel fishcakes with creamy mashed potato and a crunchy layer of breadcrumbs, served with paprika chips and lemon mayo Its time to get out the frying pan and make room for some incredibly delicious salmon and mackerel fishcakes. Jam packed full of creamy mashed potatoes and chunky smoked fish, and delicately coated with...

Read More

The post Smoked Salmon and Mackerel Fishcakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Salmon and mackerel fishcakes with creamy mashed potato and a crunchy layer of breadcrumbs, served with paprika chips and lemon mayo

salmon fishcakes and paprika chips

Its time to get out the frying pan and make room for some incredibly delicious salmon and mackerel fishcakes. Jam packed full of creamy mashed potatoes and chunky smoked fish, and delicately coated with a crispy layer of breadcrumbs, the only problem you'll have is knowing when to stop. I honestly sat and ate 4 of these in one go without even the slightest bit of hesitation or thought for my waistline. They are just too good.

Delicious Magazine

Although I did make these amazing fishcakes with my own fair hands I cannot take all the credit - this is an adapted recipe from last months Delicious Magazine. These fishcakes were sitting proud as punch on the front cover of Mays edition and I knew as soon as I saw them that I had to give them a try.

salmon fishcakes and paprika chips

Fishcake meal prep

Not only did I find the fishcakes super easy to make but I was also able to make them up in advance and then leave them in the fridge until I was ready to cook and serve. Who doesn't love coming home to dinner already prepped and ready to go? They are also a great idea for a summer garden party: prep ahead, cook when needed, and handout as posh canapes. - definite winner.

Keeping an eye on the pennies

When I originally went shopping for these fishcake ingredients, my first hurdle came about when I saw the amount of hot smoked salmon required and then saw the price of said salmon. This is no cheap piece of fish and if you intend to make a few fishcakes for a few hungry mouths then hot smoked salmon alone may turn into a rather expensive affair. And so in order to keep a check of the purse strings I decided to halve the amount of salmon and make up the rest with the much cheaper (but no less tasty) smoked mackerel.

fishcake ingredients

And I will make no apologies for this, as the outcome in both taste and texture was superb. My other change to this recipe was the addition of red spring onions as well as the standard white spring onions. Only because they were sitting right next to the standard spring onions and looked so lovely and plump and purple.

salmon fishcake ingredients

Making the fishcakes

So the preparation for this dish couldn't be simpler. Firstly I made up a batch of creamy mashed potato (I just love mashed potato - I could eat it all day long). Then I prepared the fish, onions, lemon and herbs before placing everything into one bowl and mixing well.

fishcakes mixed ingredients

I divided the mixture into eight and then used my hands to make each eighth into a round ball. I placed all the balls onto a large board and then flattened and shaped into fishcakes.

making the fishcakes

Next I coated each fishcake with flour, whisked egg and breadcrumbs.

fishcakes dipped in flour eggs and breadcrumbs

And finally the fishcakes were fried off in a frying pan and served

salmon fishcakes homemade mayo and paprika chips

To complete the meal I also made the paprika chips and lemon mayo; recipes which were also provided by Mays edition of Delicious magazine.

salmon fishcakes homemade mayo and paprika chips

These fishcakes are so tasty and so easy to make and I'm sure they will be winner in any household and at any occasion.

For more potato cake recipe ideas check out my rosemary and pancetta sweet potato cakes

Other fish recipes

**Estimated nutritional information per serving and per 100g of fishcakes. If you want to find out more about how the information is calculated and the sources used, please refer to my Nutrition Information Guide.

📖 Recipe

fishcakes with dill and lemon
Print

Smoked Salmon and Mackerel Fishcakes

Salmon and mackerel fishcakes with creamy mashed potato and a crunchy layer of breadcrumbs, served with paprika chips and lemon mayo
Course Dinner, lunch
Cuisine British
Prep Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 2 hours 15 minutes
Servings 8 fishcakes
Calories 637kcal

Ingredients

For the fishcakes:

  • 500 g maris piper potatoes peeled and cut into chunks
  • 30 g butter
  • 20 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 180 g hot smoked salmon fillet
  • 250 g smoked mackerel fillet
  • 1 tablespoon chives - finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 white spring onions finely chopped
  • 2 red spring onions finely chopped
  • 1 Zest and juice of lemon plus extra wedges for serving
  • 4 tablespoon flour
  • 2 medium eggs whisked
  • 200 g breadcrumbs
  • 3 tablespoon rapeseed oil for frying
  • 15 g fresh dill

For the paprika chips:

  • 800 g Maris piper potatoes skin on cut into thin chips
  • 2 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil

For the lemon Mayo:

  • 2 medium free range egg yolks
  • 1 teaspoon dijon mustard
  • 300 ml light olive oil
  • zest of 1 lemon and a teaspoon of juice
  • small handful of chopped fresh dill

Instructions

Preparing the fishcakes:

  • Place the chunks of potato into a pan of boiling water and simmer gently for 30 minutes or until soft. Drain, season and mash together with the butter and milk. Allow the mash to cool then transfer into a large bowl.
  • Flake the salmon and mackerel and add to the mash along with the chives, parsley, spring onion, lemon zest and lemon juice. Mix together well until all ingredients are spread evenly through the potato.
  • Divide the mixture into eight and use your hands to form 8 balls. lay the balls on a board and then flatten and shape into fishcakes.
  • Place the flour, whisked eggs and breadcrumbs into three separate dishes. take each fishcake and place in each of the bowls so to coat in flour, followed by egg and then breadcrumbs. Chill the fishcakes for at least 30 minutes before cooking. If preparing in advance, cover fishcakes with cling film and leave in the fridge up to 24 hours before frying off.

To make the lemon mayo:

  • In a large bowl whisk together the egg yolks and mustard and season. Continue to whisk and gradually add the oil. Dont add the oil too quick or the mixture will split. Once the oil has been whisked in, add the lemon zest and juice and whisk again. taste and add more seasoning, mustard, lemon if desired.

To make the paprika chips:

  • pre heat the oven to 180 degrees C. Place the sliced potato on a baking tray, drizzle with the oil and sprinkle over the paprika. Season if desired and then toss together to fully coat. Place the chips in the oven and bake for around 30 minutes. Check and turn at 15 minutes.

Cooking and serving:

  • After chilling, remove the fishcakes from then fridge. Heat the oil in a frying pan and fry the fishcakes for 3-4 minutes on each side or until golden brown. Drain on kitchen towel before serving with the paprika chips. Garnish with wedges of lemon and fresh dill.

Nutrition

Serving: 357g | Calories: 637kcal | Carbohydrates: 40.4g | Protein: 38.9g | Fat: 36.8g | Saturated Fat: 9.8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Fiber: 3.1g

The post Smoked Salmon and Mackerel Fishcakes appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/salmon-and-mackerel-fishcakes/feed/ 10
Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/ https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/#comments Sun, 04 Feb 2018 08:30:25 +0000 https://properfoodie.com/?p=5879 Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . . NUTELLA TIGELLA! Nutella Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first,...

Read More

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!. . .

NUTELLA TIGELLA!

Italian Tigella with cheese and ham filling

Nutella

Its February! and I have 3 reasons for Nutella consumption this month! The first, which is just around the corner, is World Nutella Day. Yep a whole day devoted to Nutella. The second is pancake day and even though I'm generally a honey and lemon kinda girl, there might be the odd dip in the Nutella jar. And of course the third is Valentines - and I guess consumption of any kind of chocolate in huge quantities is allowed on Valentines day 🙂

Valentines Tigella

Tigella

So now lets talk about Tigella!! NUTELLA TIGELLA. Ben and I were first introduced to the amazing Nutella Tigella in Bologna last year after our amazing Italian wedding when we were honeymooning around Tuscany. We had never come across this type of Italian bread before, even though it was our 5th visit to Italy! I'm so glad that we decided to sit down and give them try.

debbie and ben at zerocinquantino in Bologna

ham and cheese tigella in Bologna

Not content with our basket full of savoury Tigella, we just had to try the Nutella Tigella as well.

nutella tigella in Bologna

Mmm, amazing!! So you know that I just had to give these a whirl myself at home - and World Nutella Day has forced me into action.

Tigella one with brie and ham and one with nutella

Homemade Italian Tigella

The Tigella is quite a basic bread dough, with the addition of a bit of butter. Its actually not a million miles away from my mini bread rolls recipe.

This dough needs to be left to rise (prove) twice, the first time for an hour and the second for 30 minutes, so you need at least an afternoon free to give these delightful little breads a go.

Tigella dough

Unlike the bread rolls, once this dough has risen once, it is then knocked back and rolled out. I rolled my dough to about half a cm in thickness and then cut out my Tigella circles with a 3 inch round cutter (a glass would do the same job).

Tigella dough cut into Tigella circles

These are then proved a second time before being baked for 10 minutes or until they puff up into little pillows - bellissimo! And so simple.

Tigella baked in the oven

Traditionally the Tigella is made in a metal clamp type instrument, which gives them their golden brown colour and imprints a pretty pattern on either side. As the Tigella implement isn't cheap, I decided to improvise.

toastie maker tigella

Baking in the oven for 10 minutes means that the Tigella keep their round shape as they cook and then a quick blast in a toastie maker gives them a lovely golden finish. Although they literally need about 30 seconds in the toastie maker - any more and they dry out a little too much.

I cut mine open after they had baked in the oven and then quickly toasted before adding fillings.

Nutella first:

Nutella Tigella

and then plenty of ham and cheese:

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet

I'm thinking this would make such a lovely feast on Valentines Day 🙂

Find out what else we got to on our honeymoon at Torciano winery and in San Gimignano

📖 Recipe

Italian Tigella savoury and sweet
Print

Italian Tigella

Italian Tigella! The bestest snack we had in Italy last year. These plump little circles of bread are served warm with your choice of hams and cheeses . . . or a huge dollop of Nutella!
Course Dessert, party food, pudding
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 1 hour 50 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 2 hours
Calories 109kcal

Ingredients

  • 500 g 00 Flour
  • 200 ml water
  • 100 ml semi skimmed milk
  • 25 g unsalted butter
  • 10 g fresh yeast or 7g dried yeast
  • Pinch of sea salt

Equipment

  • Large mixing bowl
  • Small pan for heating
  • 3 inch round cutter or upside down glass
  • Lightly oiled baking trays
  • Toastie machine if you wish to toast to a golden brown colour

Instructions

  • Mix the water and milk together in a small pan and heat until just warm (luke warm). Use your finger to test the temperature and stop heating as soon as the mixture feels slightly warm. Next dissolve the yeast in the milk and water and leave to activate for around 10 minutes.
  • Meanwhile melt the butter in a pan or in the microwave. Then sieve the flour into a large bowl and add the salt. Mix well with your fingers then make a well in the flour and pour in the melted butter. Start to mix the flour gradually with your fingers and then begin to add the milk mixture bit by bit. Add enough of the milk mix until the dough comes together. Turn the dough out onto a floured work surface and knead for 10 minutes or until smooth.
  • Lightly oil the bowl and place the kneaded dough in the centre then cover with cling film. Leave to prove (rise) for 1 hour.
  • After an hour turn out the dough and divide into 2 manageable pieces. Roll out one half to around half a cm thick. Using a 3 inch circular cutter or an upside down glass, cut circular shapes into the rolled dough. Gather up the left over dough, re-roll and cut out more circles. Repeat this with the second half of the dough.
  • Line up the dough tigella on lightly oiled baking trays and cover with a damp tea towel. Leave to rise for a second time for 30 minutes.
  • Pre heat oven to 180 degrees
  • After 30 minutes remove the tea towel and transfer the tigella to the oven and bake for 10 minutes.
  • Once baked, slice in half and add your favourite fillings. To add a touch of colour, place the tigella in a toastie maker for 30 seconds before adding the filling.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 109kcal | Carbohydrates: 17.7g | Protein: 7.3g | Fat: 1.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.8g | Sodium: 80mg

The post Italian Tigella from Bologna, Italy appeared first on ProperFoodie.

]]>
https://properfoodie.com/italian-tigella/feed/ 8